ACCOUNTING FOR ALL — GRADE 9
Office Operations and Accounting
Aligned with the Secondary Education Curriculum of the Curriculum Development Centre (CDC), Government of Nepal, Sanothimi, Bhaktapur
Book Title: Accounting for All — Grade 9 (Office Operations and Accounting)
Target Level: Grade 9 (Secondary Level — Optional / Elective Subject)
Medium: English
Currency Standard: Nepalese Rupees (NPR / Rs.)
Preface
Welcome to Accounting for All — Grade 9, a comprehensive textbook covering the foundations of office administration, commercial bookkeeping, and government accounting.In the secondary education curriculum developed by the Curriculum Development Centre (CDC), Grade 9 introduces the dual pillars of organizational life: Office Operations and Accounting. An accountant does not work in a vacuum; every voucher, invoice, journal entry, ledger account, trial balance, and government treasury report originates inside an office system governed by correspondence, record management, legal structures, and institutional procedures. This textbook covers 100% of the prescribed CDC Grade 9 syllabus, blending classical definitions, comparative tables, institutional practices, step-by-step numerical illustrations, and examination-oriented exercises.
Overview of the Grade 9 Curriculum & Book Structure (Table of Contents)
This textbook is organized into Two Parts and 16 Comprehensive Units, synthesizing both the classic 13-unit CDC textbook framework and the revised 16-unit specification grid:
| Part | Unit | Unit Title | Core Syllabus Coverage | Teaching Periods |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Part I: Office Operations & Business | Unit 1 | Office and Office Personnel | Meaning, functions, importance, types of offices, office management, and employee hierarchy in Nepal | 7 Periods |
| Part I: Office Operations & Business | Unit 2 | Office Assistant | Meaning, types (P.A., Receptionist, Sectional Clerk), functions, qualifications, and personal/professional qualities | 5 Periods |
| Part I: Office Operations & Business | Unit 3 | Office Resources | Meaning, importance, and classification: Human, Physical, Financial, and Informational/Intellectual resources | 4 Periods |
| Part I: Office Operations & Business | Unit 4 | Office Correspondence | Meaning, qualities & parts of a letter, types of letters, Entry and Dispatch registers, Notice, Circular, Mandatory Order, and Official Memo | 8 Periods |
| Part I: Office Operations & Business | Unit 5 | Record Keeping & Management | Meaning, objectives, Record Disposal Regulation 2027 B.S. (4 classes of records), principles, record cycle, and filing intro | 5 Periods |
| Part I: Office Operations & Business | Unit 6 | Postal & Electronic Communication | Communication methods, Nepal Post history (General Post Office 1878 A.D., UPU), mail types, and modern IT communication | 10 Periods |
| Part I: Office Operations & Business | Unit 7 | Business: Concept, Evolution & Types | Industry, Commerce, Trade (Home vs. Foreign), Auxiliaries to Trade, and Fundamentals of Business Taxation in Nepal | 6 Periods |
| Part I: Office Operations & Business | Unit 8 | Forms of Business Organization | Sole Trading, Partnership, Joint Stock Company, Public Enterprises, Cooperatives, and Multinational Companies (MNCs) | 8 Periods |
| Part I: Office Operations & Business | Unit 9 | Assembly, Meeting, Conference & Seminar | Mass assembly, types of meetings, conference, seminar, notice, agenda, quorum, and drafting/endorsement of Minutes | 10 Periods |
| Part II: Accounting & Bookkeeping | Unit 10 | Bookkeeping and Accounting | Evolution of bookkeeping, meaning/objectives/limitations of accounting, branches of accounting, and accounting cycle | 7 Periods |
| Part II: Accounting & Bookkeeping | Unit 11 | Basic Accounting Concepts & Systems | Single vs. Double Entry (Luca Pacioli 1494), Cash vs. Accrual basis, GAAP concepts, Accounting Equation, and Terminologies | 8 Periods |
| Part II: Accounting & Bookkeeping | Unit 12 | Journal Entries | Book of original entry, Traditional (Golden) & Modern rules of Debit/Credit, and step-by-step numerical journalizing | 10 Periods |
| Part II: Accounting & Bookkeeping | Unit 13 | Ledger | Principal book of accounts, Journal vs. Ledger, posting rules, balancing accounts (c/d and b/d), and full numericals | 10 Periods |
| Part II: Accounting & Bookkeeping | Unit 14 | Subsidiary Books & Cash Book | Purchase, Sales, Purchase Return, Sales Return Books; Single, Double (Contra entry), and Triple Column Cash Books | 16 Periods |
| Part II: Accounting & Bookkeeping | Unit 15 | Trial Balance & Accounting Errors | Objectives, Total/Balance/Mixed methods, Dr./Cr. checklist, Errors disclosed vs. not disclosed, Suspense Account, numericals | 6 Periods |
| Part II: Accounting & Bookkeeping | Unit 16 | Government Accounting in Nepal | Government vs. Commercial accounting, historical systems, New Accounting System, OAG, FCGO, and DTCO | 10 Periods |
| Appendix | Exam Prep | Model Question Paper & Answer Key | CDC 75-Mark Theory + 25-Mark Practical Specification Grid, Full Model Question Paper, and Solutions | — |
Detailed Chapter and Section Index
| Chapter / Unit | Sub-Sections Covered |
|---|---|
| UNIT 1: OFFICE AND OFFICE PERSONNEL | Learning Objectives; 1.1 Meaning and Definition of an Office; 1.2 Functions of a Modern Office; 1.3 Importance of an Office; 1.4 Types of Offices; 1.5 Formation of an Office; 1.6 Office Personnel; Things to Remember (Unit 1 Summary); Exercises (Unit 1) |
| UNIT 2: OFFICE ASSISTANT | Learning Objectives; 2.1 Meaning and Definition of an Office Assistant; 2.2 Types of Office Assistants; 2.3 Functions and Duties of an Office Assistant; 2.4 Qualifications of an Office Assistant; 2.5 Qualities (Traits) of a Good Office Assistant; Things to Remember (Unit 2 Summary); Exercises (Unit 2) |
| UNIT 3: OFFICE RESOURCES | Learning Objectives; 3.1 Meaning and Definition of Office Resources; 3.2 Importance and Necessity of Office Resources; 3.3 Types of Office Resources; Things to Remember (Unit 3 Summary); Exercises (Unit 3) |
| UNIT 4: OFFICE CORRESPONDENCE | Learning Objectives; 4.1 Meaning, Objectives, and Importance of Correspondence; 4.2 Qualities of a Good Letter (The 8 Essential Traits); 4.3 Structure (Parts) of an Official or Business Letter; 4.4 Types of Letters and Model Specimens; 4.5 Handling of Mail: Entry (Incoming Mail) and Dispatch (Outgoing Mail); 4.6 Official Communication Tools: Notice, Circular, Mandatory Order, and Official Memo; Things to Remember (Unit 4 Summary); Exercises (Unit 4) |
| UNIT 5: RECORD KEEPING AND RECORD MANAGEMENT | Learning Objectives; 5.1 Meaning of Record, Record Keeping, and Record Management; 5.2 Objectives and Importance of Record Management; 5.3 Classification and Disposal of Records in Nepal; 5.4 Principles of Record Management and the Record Cycle; Things to Remember (Unit 5 Summary); Exercises (Unit 5) |
| UNIT 6: POSTAL AND ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SERVICES | Learning Objectives; 6.1 Concept and Importance of Communication in an Office; 6.2 Postal Services and Historical Development in Nepal; 6.3 Importance of Postal Service; 6.4 Methods of Sending Letters and Articles Through Post; 6.5 Electronic Communication Services and Information Technology (IT); Things to Remember (Unit 6 Summary); Exercises (Unit 6) |
| UNIT 7: BUSINESS — CONCEPT, EVOLUTION, TYPES, AND AUXILIARIES | Learning Objectives; 7.1 Meaning, Definition, and Characteristics of Business; 7.2 Classification of Business Activities: Industry and Commerce; 7.3 Fundamentals of Business Taxation in Nepal; Things to Remember (Unit 7 Summary); Exercises (Unit 7) |
| UNIT 8: FORMS OF BUSINESS ORGANIZATION | Learning Objectives; 8.1 Overview of Business Ownership Structures in Nepal; 8.2 Detailed Study of Each Form of Business Organization; Things to Remember (Unit 8 Summary); Exercises (Unit 8) |
| UNIT 9: ASSEMBLY, MEETING, CONFERENCE, AND SEMINAR | Learning Objectives; 9.1 Meaning of Assembly, Meeting, Conference, and Seminar; 9.2 Types of Meetings; 9.3 Essential Requisites of a Valid Meeting; 9.4 Minutes of a Meeting and Endorsement; Things to Remember (Unit 9 Summary); Exercises (Unit 9) |
| UNIT 10: BOOKKEEPING AND ACCOUNTING | Learning Objectives; 10.1 Meaning and Evolution of Bookkeeping; 10.2 Meaning, Objectives, Functions, and Limitations of Accounting; 10.3 Interrelationship and Differences Between Bookkeeping and Accounting; 10.4 Branches (Types) of Accounting; 10.5 The Accounting Process / Accounting Cycle; Things to Remember (Unit 10 Summary); Exercises (Unit 10) |
| UNIT 11: BASIC ACCOUNTING CONCEPTS, SYSTEMS, AND TERMINOLOGIES | Learning Objectives; 11.1 Accounting Systems: Single Entry vs. Double Entry System; 11.2 Bases of Accounting: Cash Basis vs. Accrual Basis; 11.3 Basic Accounting Concepts / Assumptions; 11.4 Basic Accounting Terminologies; Things to Remember (Unit 11 Summary); Exercises (Unit 11) |
| UNIT 12: JOURNAL ENTRIES | Learning Objectives; 12.1 Meaning, Objectives, and Format of a Journal; 12.2 Rules of Debit and Credit; 12.3 Master Guide to Standard Journal Entries (All Syllabus Scenarios); 12.4 Comprehensive Worked Numerical Illustrations; Things to Remember (Unit 12 Summary); Exercises (Unit 12) |
| UNIT 13: LEDGER | Learning Objectives; 13.1 Meaning, Definition, and Objectives of a Ledger; 13.2 Differences Between Journal and Ledger; 13.3 Specimen of a Ledger Account (8 Columns in ‘T’ Form); 13.4 Step-by-Step Rules for Posting from Journal to Ledger; 13.5 Balancing and Closing of Ledger Accounts; 13.6 Complete Worked Numerical Illustration (Journal to Ledger & Balancing); Things to Remember (Unit 13 Summary); Exercises (Unit 13) |
| UNIT 14: SUBSIDIARY BOOKS AND CASH BOOK | Learning Objectives; 14.1 Meaning, Need, and Types of Subsidiary Books; 14.2 Merchandise Subsidiary Books: Formats and Worked Illustrations; 14.3 Cash Book: Types, Contra Entries, and Worked Illustrations; 14.4 Concept of Petty Cash Book; Things to Remember (Unit 14 Summary); Exercises (Unit 14) |
| UNIT 15: TRIAL BALANCE AND ACCOUNTING ERRORS | Learning Objectives; 15.1 Meaning, Definition, and Objectives of a Trial Balance; 15.2 Methods and Specimen of Preparing a Trial Balance; 15.3 Comprehensive Master Checklist of Debit vs. Credit Items in a Trial Balance; 15.4 Accounting Errors and Suspense Account; 15.5 Worked Numerical Illustrations; Things to Remember (Unit 15 Summary); Exercises (Unit 15) |
| UNIT 16: GOVERNMENT ACCOUNTING IN NEPAL | Learning Objectives; 16.1 Meaning, Definition, and Objectives of Government Accounting; 16.2 Differences Between Government Accounting and Commercial Accounting; 16.3 Historical Evolution of Government Accounting in Nepal; 16.4 The New Accounting System of Nepal (2018 / 2019 B.S.); 16.5 Constitutional and Financial Organs of Government Accounting in Nepal; Things to Remember (Unit 16 Summary); Exercises (Unit 16) |
| APPENDIX: CDC SPECIFICATION GRID, MODEL QUESTION PAPER, AND ANSWER KEY | A.1 CDC External & Internal Evaluation Framework (Grade 9); A.2 Full-Length Model Question Paper (75 Marks); A.3 Answer Key to Model Question Paper Numericals |
Solutions
Worked answers to the exercises at the end of every unit, and to the whole model question paper, are in the Solutions section at the end of the book, starting with Unit 1 Solutions. Try each exercise on your own first.
UNIT 1: OFFICE AND OFFICE PERSONNEL
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define an office in both its traditional (place-based) and modern (function-based) senses.
- Explain the basic (routine) and administrative management functions of a modern office.
- Analyze the importance of an office to management, workers, shareholders, customers, and government.
- Classify offices based on ownership and motive (Government, Business, and Service-Motive Offices) and duration (Permanent and Temporary Offices).
- Describe the concept of office management and the hierarchy of office personnel in Nepal (Office Chief, Sectional Chief, and Office Assistant, including Nepal Civil Service ranks).
1.1 Meaning and Definition of an Office
In everyday language, an office is understood as a room or building where clerical and administrative work—such as reading letters, writing reports, maintaining files, and keeping accounts—is carried out. However, in modern management and accounting, the term office refers to the functions performed (information collection, processing, recording, and communication) rather than merely the four walls of a physical building.
If an accountant audits inventory in a warehouse or an executive approves a contract via laptop while traveling, that activity is still office work. Thus, an office is the administrative nerve center of any organization where policies are formulated, activities are coordinated, and records are preserved.
Classical Definitions of an Office:
- “An office may be regarded as a place where the control mechanisms of an organization are located.” — George R. Terry
- “An office is any place where clerical operations are carried out.” — J.C. Denyer
- “An office exists anywhere, where certain kinds of work are performed.” — Edward Roche
- “The office is the administrative center of a business.” — Mills and Standingford
1.2 Functions of a Modern Office
The functions of a modern office are divided into two broad categories: Basic (Routine) Functions and Administrative Management Functions.
A. Basic (Information-Handling) Functions
Every office, regardless of size or sector, acts as an information pipeline performing five core steps:
- Collecting and Receiving Information: Gathering internal information (departmental reports, staff attendance, stock levels, cash balances) and external information (letters, invoices, circulars, telephone calls, emails, government directives, customer inquiries).
- Recording Information: Preserving collected information systematically in written or digital records (entry books, accounting journals, ledgers, minutes, personnel registers) so it can be verified in the future and presented as legal evidence.
- Processing and Arranging Information: Sorting, classifying, calculating, and summarizing raw data into meaningful formats—such as converting hundreds of daily sales bills into a monthly sales summary, Trial Balance, or Income Statement acceptable to the Inland Revenue Department.
- Storing and Preserving Information: Safeguarding valuable records, deeds, contracts, licenses, and audit reports through scientific filing and indexing systems for future retrieval.
- Communicating (Supplying) Information: Acting as a two-way channel that supplies processed reports upward to top management for decision-making and transmits executive orders, budgets, and guidelines downward to departments and outward to customers, creditors, and regulators.
B. Administrative Management Functions
Beyond handling information, an office must manage human and physical resources to operate smoothly:
- Carrying Out Management Processes: Applying planning, organizing, directing, coordinating, and controlling to daily office workflows.
- Designing and Standardizing Office Forms and Stationery: Selecting, printing, and controlling standardized vouchers, invoices, letterheads, and requisition slips to save time and reduce clerical costs.
- Establishing Office Systems and Routines: Defining clear step-by-step procedures for recurring tasks (such as mail handling, purchasing, and payroll disbursement).
- Selecting and Maintaining Furniture, Machines, and Equipment: Procuring desks, chairs, filing cabinets, computers, printers, scanners, and accounting software, and arranging their regular maintenance.
- Personnel Administration: Recruiting, training, placing, remunerating, motivating, and evaluating office staff, as well as administering employee provident funds, citizen investment trusts, and leave records.
- Safeguarding Organizational Assets: Protecting buildings, cash, securities, inventory, and vital deeds against theft, fire, dampness, and unauthorized access through insurance and internal controls.
- Maintaining Public Relations: Building organizational goodwill through courteous reception of visitors, prompt handling of complaints, and transparent communication with stakeholders.
1.3 Importance of an Office
It is rightly said: “The office is to a business what the mainspring is to a watch.” Just as the human brain receives sensory signals and directs the body’s organs, the office coordinates every department of an enterprise. Its importance can be summarized across eight key dimensions:
- Serves as an Information Center (Data Bank): Stores historical and current figures on sales, costs, assets, and liabilities, forming the foundation for forecasting and budgeting.
- Acts as a Channel of Communication: Connects top executives with operational workers and links the organization with external suppliers, banks, customers, and government agencies.
- Aids in Organizational Coordination: Harmonizes the activities of production, purchasing, marketing, human resources, and finance departments so they work toward a unified goal.
- Facilitates Managerial Control: Provides the standard benchmarks and actual performance reports needed by managers to measure performance and correct deviations.
- Supports Workers and Employees: Ensures timely preparation of attendance records, wage and salary sheets, bonus calculations, and social security/provident fund contributions.
- Links Shareholders and Creditors: Issues share certificates, dividend warrants, meeting notices, and financial statements to investors, while maintaining accurate payment schedules for creditors.
- Serves Customers: Processes customer inquiries, quotations, orders, invoices, and after-sales complaints promptly.
- Fulfills Legal and Government Obligations: Files tax returns, renews business registrations, complies with labor laws, and maintains statutory records required by the Government of Nepal.
1.4 Types of Offices
Offices in Nepal are classified on two primary bases: On the Basis of Ownership/Motive and On the Basis of Duration (Nature of Work).
Comparison of Offices by Ownership and Motive
| Basis of Comparison | 1. Government Offices | 2. Business Offices | 3. Service-Motive Offices |
|---|---|---|---|
| Primary Objective | Rendering public services, maintaining law and order, collecting revenue, and building national infrastructure | Earning profit and maximizing wealth through production and distribution of goods/services | Providing humanitarian, social, cultural, or educational welfare without a profit motive |
| Ownership & Control | Wholly owned, funded, and controlled by the Government of Nepal (Federal, Provincial, or Local levels) | Owned by the government (>51% share in Government Business Offices) or private individuals/shareholders (Private Business Offices) | Managed by an elected executive or management committee formed by members, trustees, or social workers |
| Major Source of Income | Tax revenue (income tax, VAT, customs), non-tax revenue (fees, fines, royalties), and foreign grants/loans | Sale of goods and services, capital invested by proprietors/shareholders, and commercial bank loans | Membership subscriptions, entrance fees, charity donations, grants, and income from trust property |
| Accounting System | Cash-based Government Accounting System (New Accounting System / CGAS using AGF forms) | Double-entry commercial accounting on an accrual basis (Journal, Ledger, Trial Balance, Final Accounts) | Receipts and Payments Account, Income and Expenditure Account, and Balance Sheet |
| Auditing Authority | Audited constitutionally by the Office of the Auditor General | Audited by independent registered auditors (Chartered Accountants / Registered Auditors under ICAN) | Audited by registered auditors appointed by the general assembly or governing board |
| Examples in Nepal | Ministries, Department of Inland Revenue, District Administration Office (DAO), Ward Offices | Govt. Business: Nepal Telecom, Nepal Oil Corporation; Private: Bhat-Bhateni Supermarket, Himalayan Bank | Nepal Red Cross Society, Nepal Scout, Lions Club, Paropakar Sanstha, Maiti Nepal |
Classification Based on Duration / Nature of Setup
- Permanent Office: Established to carry out continuous, long-term operations with no fixed closing date (e.g., Ministry of Finance, Nepal Rastra Bank, Tribhuvan University, commercial banks).
- Temporary / Ad-hoc Office: Established for a specific project, event, disaster relief effort, or fixed time period, and dissolved immediately upon completion of that task (e.g., National Population Census Office, Melamchi Water Supply Project site office, Election Officer’s Office during general elections, or an Industrial Trade Fair Secretariat).
1.5 Formation of an Office
An office may be set up as a permanent or temporary entity through:
- Constitutional or Legislative Enactment: Government ministries, constitutional bodies, and public corporations formed under the Constitution or specific Acts.
- Registration under Prevailing Laws: Private firms, partnerships, companies, and NGOs registered at the Department of Commerce, Office of the Company Registrar, or District Administration Office.
- Executive Resolution or Project Charter: Temporary project offices or committee secretariats created by a formal decision of a parent organization.
1.6 Office Personnel
Office personnel refer to all human resources—from the top executive to the lowest-ranking support staff—who apply their physical and mental efforts to achieve organizational goals.
“The office personnel refers to all the employees of the office comprising the chief, sectional chiefs, and assistants who jointly work for the attainment of the organizational goals.” — Beach
Three-Tier Hierarchy of Office Personnel
| Level of Personnel | Role & Designation in General Offices | Equivalent Ranks in Nepal Civil Service | Core Responsibilities |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Office Chief (Top Level) | Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Managing Director, General Manager, Principal, Office Manager | Secretary, Joint Secretary, or Under Secretary / Chief District Officer depending on office level | Formulating plans and budgets, delegating authority, maintaining discipline, approving financial expenditures, and representing the office externally |
| 2. Sectional Chief (Middle Level) | Account Officer, HR Manager, Procurement Head, Exam Coordinator, Department Head | Under Secretary or Section Officer | Leading a specific section/department, supervising assistants, verifying vouchers and official memo drafts, and reporting sectional progress to the Office Chief |
| 3. Office Assistant (Operating Level) | Accountant, Receptionist, Personal Assistant (P.A.), Computer Operator, Filing Clerk | Senior Non-Gazetted First Class Assistant, Non-Gazetted Second Class Assistant, Junior Clerk, and Office Helper | Executing day-to-day routine clerical work: registering incoming/outgoing mail, drafting letters, writing books of accounts, filing documents, and serving visitors |
Things to Remember (Unit 1 Summary)
- Modern definitions of an office emphasize functions (information collection, recording, processing, preservation, and communication) over a physical room.
- Offices are broadly classified by motive/ownership into Government Offices, Business Offices (Government Business and Private Business), and Service-Motive Offices, and by duration into Permanent and Temporary offices.
- Office Personnel are categorized into three levels: Office Chief (top administrative head), Sectional Chief (departmental head), and Office Assistant (operational/clerical staff).
Exercises (Unit 1)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Define an office in one sentence.
- What is meant by the basic functions of an office?
- Give two examples of government business offices in Nepal.
- What is a service-motive office? Give two examples operating in Nepal.
- Who is an Office Chief?
- Name any two ranks of office personnel in the Nepal Civil Service.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Explain the four basic (information-handling) functions of a modern office.
- Differentiate between a Government Office and a Business Office on any four bases.
- Distinguish between a Permanent Office and a Temporary Office with suitable examples from Nepal.
- Who is a Sectional Chief? State any four functions performed by a Sectional Chief.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- “The office is to a business what the mainspring is to a watch.” In light of this statement, explain the importance of an office to a modern organization.
- What is meant by office personnel? Explain the three types of office personnel and describe the major functions of an Office Chief (Office Manager).
D. Project Work / Practical Assignment
Visit your school’s administrative and accounts office or a nearby local Ward Office. Interview the administrative head and prepare a one-page organizational chart showing the Office Chief, Sectional Chiefs, and Office Assistants along with two daily duties of each.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 1 Solutions.
UNIT 2: OFFICE ASSISTANT
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define an Office Assistant and explain their role as the backbone of routine office administration.
- Classify and distinguish the three major types of Office Assistants: Personal Assistant (P.A.), Receptionist, and Sectional Clerk.
- Describe the routine functions and duties of an Office Assistant.
- Identify the essential qualifications and personal/professional qualities required of an effective Office Assistant.
2.1 Meaning and Definition of an Office Assistant
An Office Assistant is a subordinate or operating-level employee who performs routine clerical, administrative, and accounting tasks under the direction and supervision of the Office Chief and Sectional Chiefs. In Nepal’s government sector, positions such as Senior Clerical Assistant (Non-Gazetted First Class), Junior Clerical Assistant (Non-Gazetted Second Class), and Computer Operator function as office assistants, while in private companies they hold titles such as Junior Accountant, Administrative Assistant, Front Desk Officer, or Executive Secretary.
2.2 Types of Office Assistants
Based on the nature of duties assigned, office assistants are classified into three major categories:
| Type of Office Assistant | Primary Role & Placement | Key Daily Duties |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Personal Assistant (P.A.) / Private Secretary | Appointed to assist a specific high-ranking executive (e.g., Minister, Secretary, Managing Director, CEO) | Managing the executive’s daily appointment diary, screening phone calls and visitors, handling confidential correspondence, taking dictation, and arranging travel and meeting schedules |
| 2. Receptionist (Front Desk Officer) | Stationed at the main entrance or inquiry desk of the office to greet and guide visitors | Welcoming visitors courteously, answering incoming telephone calls, maintaining the visitor logbook, providing general information about the organization, and directing guests to the concerned sections |
| 3. Sectional Clerk (Departmental Assistant) | Assigned to a specific functional section (Accounts Section, Administration, Procurement, Store, or Exam Section) | Performing specialized clerical tasks of that section—e.g., an Accounts Clerk prepares journal vouchers, posts ledgers, writes the cash book, and files bills, while an Administration Clerk handles mail entry, mail dispatch, and leave records |
2.3 Functions and Duties of an Office Assistant
- Receiving and Dispatching Mail (Entry and Dispatch): Receiving incoming letters, stamping them, recording them in the Entry Book, and dispatching outgoing letters after recording them in the Dispatch Book.
- Drafting Letters and Official Memos: Writing routine business letters, quotations, orders, notices, circulars, and initiating Official Memos (notes for decision-making) with supporting documents for higher approval.
- Typing, Computing, and Data Entry: Operating computers, word processors, spreadsheets, accounting software, scanners, and photocopiers to prepare clean documents and reports.
- Filing and Indexing Documents: Arranging letters, vouchers, contracts, and reports systematically in files and preparing indexes so any document can be located instantly.
- Maintaining Books of Accounts and Store Records: Recording daily financial transactions in journals, subsidiary books, ledgers, and cash books (or AGF forms in government offices), and maintaining store ledgers (Inventory Register).
- Attending to Visitors and Telephone Calls: Receiving clients, suppliers, and citizens politely, answering their queries accurately, and connecting them with the appropriate officer.
- Preparing for Meetings and Seminars: Distributing meeting notices and agendas, arranging the meeting hall, recording attendance, and assisting in drafting minutes.
2.4 Qualifications of an Office Assistant
Qualification refers to the formal education, technical training, and practical knowledge required to perform a job effectively:
- Minimum Academic Qualification: Completion of the prescribed educational level for the post—for example, SEE (Grade 10) for Non-Gazetted Second Class Assistant, Grade 12 (+2) for Non-Gazetted First Class Assistant in the Public Service Commission of Nepal, or a Bachelor’s degree (BBS/BBA) for senior corporate assistants.
- Language Proficiency: Fluency and grammatical accuracy in the official working language and international business language (English) for drafting correspondence and reports.
- Computer and IT Literacy: Practical command over word processing (bilingual word processing and typing), spreadsheets (MS Excel / Google Sheets), email, internet tools, and accounting packages (such as Tally, Busy, or CGAS/SUTRA in government offices).
- Knowledge of Accounting and Office Procedures: Thorough understanding of double-entry bookkeeping, banking operations, filing systems, and official memo drafting.
- Knowledge of Prevailing Laws and Rules: Familiarity with organizational bylaws, financial administration regulations, procurement rules, and basic tax provisions (PAN, VAT, TDS).
2.5 Qualities (Traits) of a Good Office Assistant
While qualifications are earned through study and training, qualities are personal and behavioral attributes that make an assistant trustworthy and efficient:
- Personal Appearance and Health: Neat, clean, and formal attire appropriate to the workplace, combined with good physical and mental stamina.
- Politeness and Courtesy: Speaking respectfully using polite expressions (“Good morning,” “Please,” “Thank you,” “How may I help you?”) even when dealing with frustrated customers or heavy workloads.
- Punctuality and Regularity: Arriving at the office on time every day and completing assigned tasks within deadlines.
- Honesty and Loyalty: Maintaining financial integrity when handling cash, cheques, and purchases, and remaining loyal to the organization’s mission.
- Secrecy / Confidentiality: Never leaking confidential office decisions, tenders, examination papers, financial figures, or client records to unauthorized outsiders.
- Tactfulness and Initiative: Handling delicate or unexpected situations calmly without waiting for micromanagement on routine matters.
- Cooperativeness and Team Spirit: Working harmoniously with colleagues across sections and supporting supervisors willingly.
Things to Remember (Unit 2 Summary)
- An Office Assistant executes the day-to-day operational work of an office under the guidance of the Office Chief and Sectional Chiefs.
- The three main types of office assistants are the Personal Assistant (P.A.), Receptionist, and Sectional Clerk.
- Qualification refers to academic degrees, language skills, computer training, and legal/accounting knowledge, whereas Quality refers to personal traits such as politeness, punctuality, honesty, and secrecy.
Exercises (Unit 2)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Who is an Office Assistant?
- Who is a Personal Assistant (P.A.)?
- State the primary duty of a Receptionist.
- What is meant by a Sectional Clerk?
- Mention any two academic or technical qualifications required for an Office Assistant.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Explain the three types of Office Assistants with examples.
- Describe any five daily functions performed by an Office Assistant.
- Differentiate between the qualifications and qualities of an Office Assistant.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- Why is the Office Assistant considered the operational backbone of an office? Explain the essential personal and professional qualities required of a successful Office Assistant.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 2 Solutions.
UNIT 3: OFFICE RESOURCES
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define office resources and explain why no organization can function without them.
- Analyze the necessity and importance of office resources in achieving organizational efficiency.
- Classify and explain the types of office resources: Human (Manpower), Physical (Material/Machine), Financial (Money), and Informational/Intellectual (Communication & Transportation) resources.
3.1 Meaning and Definition of Office Resources
Office Resources are all the productive inputs—commonly summarized in management as the 5 Ms (Men/Manpower, Money, Materials, Machines, and Methods/Information) plus transportation and communication facilities—utilized by an office to perform its administrative and operational activities.
Just as a factory cannot manufacture goods without raw materials and machinery, an office cannot collect, process, or communicate information without skilled employees, working capital, stationery, computers, internet connectivity, and vehicles.
3.2 Importance and Necessity of Office Resources
- Smooth and Continuous Operation: Adequate supplies of stationery, electricity, internet, and funds prevent work stoppages and administrative bottlenecks.
- Higher Efficiency and Productivity: Modern office machines (computers, high-speed scanners, accounting software) enable a single assistant to complete in minutes what previously took days of manual clerical labor.
- Accuracy and Reliability of Work: Automated calculation tools, standardized forms, and trained accountants minimize arithmetic and clerical errors in financial records.
- Economy and Cost Reduction: Proper planning and utilization of office resources prevent wastage of paper, energy, time, and funds.
- Employee Morale and Satisfaction: Well-lit, ventilated workspaces with ergonomic furniture and functional equipment reduce fatigue and motivate staff.
- Organizational Prestige and Goodwill: A well-equipped, modern office with prompt communication and clean physical facilities creates a strong impression of reliability among clients, investors, and the general public.
3.3 Types of Office Resources
In accordance with the CDC Grade 9 Syllabus, office resources are classified into the following major categories:
| Resource Category | Sub-Categories & Components | Role in Office Operations | Management Considerations |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Human Resources (Manpower) | Administrative Staff: Chiefs, Managers, Officers, Clerks; Technical Staff: Engineers, Doctors, IT Specialists, Chartered Accountants | The only active, living resource that mobilizes all other passive resources; thinks, plans, decides, and executes | Requires scientific recruitment, right-person-in-right-job placement, training, fair remuneration, and motivation |
| 2. Financial Resources (Finance) | Government: Taxes, customs, royalties, grants; Business: Capital, sales revenue, bank loans; Service: Donations, subscriptions | Acts as the lifeblood of the organization to pay salaries, rent, utilities, and purchase assets | Requires strict budgeting, internal control, double-entry accounting, and periodic auditing |
| 3. Physical & Material Resources | Durable (Fixed Assets): Land, building, furniture, computers, vehicles; Consumable (Stationery): Paper, pens, files, ink/toner, stamps | Provides the physical workspace, tools, and stationery needed for daily clerical and administrative work | Requires proper procurement procedures, store ledger (Inventory Register) recording, regular maintenance, and insurance |
| 4. Communication Resources | Telephone, mobile, email, internet, intranet, website, fax, postal service, notice boards | Enables rapid internal and external exchange of messages, orders, reports, and invoices | Selection depends on urgency, cost, confidentiality, and need for written legal proof |
| 5. Transportation Resources | Land: Bikes, cars, buses, trucks, railways; Air: Domestic & international flights, helicopters; Water: Ships/ferries | Facilitates movement of executives, field staff, mail, and office supplies across branches and clients | Selection depends on distance, geography (vital in Nepal’s hills and mountains), urgency, and cost |
| 6. Intellectual & Informational Resources | Software systems, databases, patents, copyrights, standard operating manuals, institutional memory | Enhances innovation, data security, and competitive decision-making in modern digital offices | Protected through cybersecurity, backups, and intellectual property laws |
Things to Remember (Unit 3 Summary)
- Office Resources encompass Manpower, Money (Finance), Materials/Machines (Physical), Means of Communication, Means of Transportation, and Intellectual/Informational assets.
- Human Resource (Manpower) is the supreme office resource because all other resources remain idle and unproductive without competent human direction.
- Physical materials are divided into durable goods (used for more than one year, such as furniture and computers) and consumable stationery (used up in day-to-day work, such as paper and ink).
Exercises (Unit 3)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- What is meant by office resources?
- Why is manpower considered the most active resource of an office?
- Differentiate between technical manpower and administrative manpower in one sentence.
- Give two examples of durable physical resources and two examples of consumable office materials.
- State the primary source of financial resource for a government office.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Explain the importance of office resources for the smooth operation of an organization.
- What is human resource (manpower)? Explain its types with examples.
- Describe the sources of finance for Government, Business, and Service-Motive offices.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- Define office resources and explain all major types of office resources used in a modern office in Nepal.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 3 Solutions.
UNIT 4: OFFICE CORRESPONDENCE
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define office correspondence and explain its objectives and importance.
- Describe the eight essential qualities and the standard structural parts of an effective letter.
- Classify and draft major types of letters: Government Letter, Business Letters (Inquiry, Quotation, Order, Confirmation, Complaint, Reference), Application Letter (with CV/Biodata), and Personal Letter.
- Explain and demonstrate the complete procedure of Handling of Mail in Nepal using Entry Book (Incoming Mail Register) and Dispatch Book (Outgoing Mail Register) formats.
- Define and draft a Notice, Circular, Mandatory Order, and Official Memo (Note for Decision).
4.1 Meaning, Objectives, and Importance of Correspondence
Correspondence is the formal exchange of written information, ideas, inquiries, orders, or decisions between two or more individuals or organizations through letters, notices, circulars, or electronic mail.
Main Objectives and Importance of Correspondence
- Permanent Written Evidence: Unlike oral or telephone conversations, a signed letter serves as authentic documentary proof in courts of law and audits.
- Economical and Wide Reach: Allows an organization to communicate detailed information across distant districts and foreign countries at minimal cost.
- Clarity and Precision: Gives the writer time to organize facts, figures, and policies logically before transmission.
- Creates Goodwill and Organizational Image: A courteous, neatly formatted letter acts as a “silent ambassador” that builds trust with customers, suppliers, and citizens.
- Foundation for Business Transactions: Commercial trade moves step-by-step through written correspondence (Inquiry → Quotation → Order → Confirmation → Invoice).
4.2 Qualities of a Good Letter (The 8 Essential Traits)
To achieve its purpose, an official or business letter must possess the following qualities:
- Simplicity: Written in clear, everyday language rather than pompous or archaic jargon.
- Clarity: Unambiguous wording so the reader understands the exact message on the first reading without confusion.
- Correctness / Accuracy: Free from grammatical, spelling, punctuation, and factual errors (especially dates, reference numbers, and monetary amounts).
- Completeness: Contains all necessary particulars (such as item specifications, quantities, prices, delivery dates, and payment terms) so no follow-up clarification is needed.
- Conciseness / Brevity: Conveys the complete message in as few words as possible without unnecessary repetition, respecting the reader’s time.
- Courtesy / Politeness: Maintains a respectful, positive, and polite tone even when writing a complaint or demanding overdue payment.
- Originality and Attractiveness: Follows a balanced layout with clean margins, proper paragraphing, and neat typing.
- Sincerity and Persuasiveness: Convinces the reader of the writer’s genuine intent and prompts timely action.
4.3 Structure (Parts) of an Official or Business Letter
A standard letter consists of 8 structural parts arranged in a logical sequence:
| Part No. | Name of the Part | Position & Contents | Example |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Heading (Letterhead), Ref. No., and Date | Top center (name/address/contact of sender office), top left (Ref. No.), and top right (Date) | Himalayan Books & Stationery Pvt. Ltd. Putalisadak, Kathmandu | Date: 2082-04-15 | Ref. No.: 082/83-42 |
| 2. | Inside Address | Left side below Ref. No.; name, designation, and address of the receiver | The Sales Manager, Janak Education Materials Centre Ltd., Sanothimi, Bhaktapur |
| 3. | Subject Line | Centered below Inside Address; brief 1-line summary of the letter’s purpose | Subject: Quotation for Grade 9 Accounting Textbooks |
| 4. | Salutation | Left margin below Subject; respectful greeting | Dear Sir / Madam, or Respected Sir, |
| 5. | Body of the Letter | Main text divided into 3 paragraphs: (a) Opening (reference/context), (b) Main Message (details/table), (c) Closing (action requested) | Clear paragraphs stating the inquiry, order, or administrative decision |
| 6. | Complimentary Close | Right or left side below the body; polite closing phrase matching the salutation | Yours faithfully, or Yours sincerely, |
| 7. | Signature, Name, and Designation | Below Complimentary Close; handwritten signature above typed name and title, with office seal | (Signed) Ramesh Adhikari Procurement Officer |
| 8. | Enclosures & Copy To (C.C.) | Bottom left; lists attached documents (Encl.) and offices receiving copies (C.C.), plus Superscription on the envelope | Encl.: 1. Price ListC.C.: Accounts Section |
4.4 Types of Letters and Model Specimens
1. Government Letter
Written by one government office to another, or between a government office and citizens/institutions, regarding administrative, legal, or policy matters.
2. Business Letters
Exchanged between traders, manufacturers, wholesalers, retailers, and customers in a chronological trade cycle:
- (a) Inquiry Letter: Written by a prospective buyer to a supplier asking about the availability, quality, price list, discount, and delivery terms of goods.
- (b) Quotation Letter: Written by the supplier in reply to an inquiry letter, quoting exact unit prices, trade/cash discounts, transport charges, and payment terms.
- (c) Order Letter: Written by the buyer after approving the quotation, placing a formal order for specified quantities of goods.
- (d) Confirmation / Execution Letter: Written by the seller acknowledging receipt of the order and confirming dispatch details.
- (e) Complaint & Adjustment Letter: Written by the buyer when goods received are damaged, short in quantity, delayed, or different from samples—followed by the seller’s adjustment reply.
- (f) Reference / Credit Status Letter: Written to verify the financial honesty and creditworthiness of a new customer requesting credit purchases.
Model Specimen 1: Business Order Letter
SHRESTHA EDUCATIONAL EMPORIUM
New Road, Pokhara, Kaski, Nepal
Phone: 061-52XXXX | Email: [email protected]Ref. No.: 082/83-108
Date: 2082-01-10The Marketing Manager,
National Educational Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,
Bagbazar, Kathmandu.Subject: Order for Secondary Level Textbooks
Dear Sir,
We thank you for your quotation letter Ref. No. NEP/082/45 dated 2082-01-05 and the accompanying catalogue. We are satisfied with your prices and terms of 15% trade discount and free delivery up to Pokhara bus park. Please supply the following textbooks at the earliest for the new academic session:
S.N. Title of the Book Grade Author / Edition Quantity (Copies) Unit Price (Rs.) 1. Accounting for All (Nepal Syllabus) Grade 9 2082 Revised Edition 150 450 2. Compulsory Mathematics Grade 9 2082 Revised Edition 120 500 3. Optional Mathematics Grade 9 2082 Edition 100 420 We have enclosed an A/C Payee Cheque No. 0045892 drawn on Nepal Bank Ltd., Pokhara Branch, for Rs. 50,000 (Rupees Fifty Thousand only) as an advance payment. The balance will be settled within 15 days of receiving the consignment and tax invoice. Please ensure that the books are securely packed in waterproof bundles.
Yours faithfully,
(Signed)
Bikash Shrestha
Proprietor
Encl.: Nepal Bank Ltd. Cheque No. 0045892 for Rs. 50,000.
3. Application Letter for Employment
Written by an individual to an employer applying for a vacant post advertised in a newspaper or online portal, accompanied by a Curriculum Vitae (CV) / Bio-data.
Model Specimen 2: Job Application Letter for the Post of Junior Accountant
Gokarneshwor-5, Jorpati, Kathmandu
Date: 2082-05-12The Human Resource Manager,
Everest Trading Company Ltd.,
Tripureshwor, Kathmandu.Subject: Application for the Post of Junior Accountant
Respected Sir/Madam,
With reference to your vacancy announcement published in The Rising Nepal on 2082-05-08 for the post of Junior Accountant, I wish to offer my candidacy for the same.I have completed my Secondary Education Examination (SEE) and Higher Secondary (+2) in Management with a specialization in Accountancy, securing a GPA of 3.65. In addition, I have completed a 6-month professional diploma in Computerized Accounting (Tally Prime, MS Excel, and e-TDS/VAT filing) and worked for one year as an Accounts Assistant at Pashupati Enterprises, Chabahil. I am well-versed in preparing journal vouchers, maintaining ledgers and triple-column cash books, reconciling bank statements, and handling office correspondence.
I have enclosed my detailed Curriculum Vitae (Bio-data) and photocopies of my academic and training certificates for your kind perusal. If given an opportunity to serve in your esteemed company, I assure you that I will discharge my duties with utmost honesty, punctuality, and dedication.
Yours faithfully,
(Signed)
Sujata Tamang
Contact: 9841XXXXXX
Encl.: 1. Curriculum Vitae (CV) | 2. Academic & Training Certificates | 3. Citizenship Copy
4.5 Handling of Mail: Entry (Incoming Mail) and Dispatch (Outgoing Mail)
In government and corporate offices, systematic handling of incoming and outgoing mail is mandatory under administrative rules.
1. Handling Incoming Mail — Registration in the Entry Book
The process of receiving incoming letters, checking their addresses, opening envelopes, stamping the receipt date, and recording their details chronologically in the Entry Book (Incoming Mail Register) is called Incoming Mail Registration (Entry).
Specimen of Entry Book (Incoming Mail Register):
| Entry No. | Date of Entry | Received Letter’s Ref. No. | Received Letter’s Date | Name of Sending Office/Person | Subject | Section / Officer Forwarded To | Signature & Date | Remarks |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 101 | 2082-02-04 | 081/82-88 | 2082-02-02 | District Education Unit, Bhaktapur | Scholarship Quota | Exam & Admin Section | Signed (02/04) | Urgent |
| 102 | 2082-02-05 | 081/82-512 | 2082-02-03 | Nepal Rastra Bank, Baluwatar | Circular on KYC | Accounts Section | Signed (02/05) | With 2 pages encl. |
2. Handling Outgoing Mail — Registration in the Dispatch Book
The process of collecting signed outgoing letters from various sections, verifying enclosures and signatures, assigning a sequential dispatch number (Dispatch No.), recording details in the Dispatch Book (Outgoing Mail Register), folding and sealing in addressed envelopes, affixing postage stamps (if sent by post), and delivering to the receiver via messenger delivery book (Messenger Book) or post office is called Outgoing Mail Dispatch.
Specimen of Dispatch Book (Outgoing Mail Register):
| Dispatch No. | Date of Dispatch | Letter Date | Name & Address of Receiving Office | Subject | Sending Section | Mode of Dispatch / Postage | Messenger/Receiver Signature | Remarks |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 205 | 2082-02-05 | 2082-02-05 | Ministry of Education, Singha Durbar | Annual Audit Report | Accounts Section | By Hand (Messenger Book) | Signed | Encl. 15 pages |
| 206 | 2082-02-06 | 2082-02-06 | Pokhara Traders, Kaski | Settlement of Invoice | Procurement | Registered Post (Rs. 25) | Receipt #442 | Cheque enclosed |
4.6 Official Communication Tools: Notice, Circular, Mandatory Order, and Official Memo
- Notice: A formal written announcement displayed on a notice board, published in newspapers, or broadcast online to inform employees, shareholders, or the general public about an upcoming event, holiday, tender, or rule. Types of notices include General Notice, Financial/Tender Notice, Meeting Notice, Public/Government Notice, Commercial Notice, and Condolence Notice.
- Circular: An official letter containing the same policy, instruction, or guideline sent simultaneously by a central/head office to multiple subordinate branches or departments. Circulars are divided into:
- Direct Circular: Sent directly from the central authority to all operating branches (e.g., Ministry of Finance directly to all District Treasury Comptroller Offices).
- Step-wise Circular: Sent from the central office to regional/provincial directorates, which then circulate it to district and local offices.
- Mandatory Order: A direct, authoritative written command issued by the Office Chief or head of department either as a standalone order or written directly on the margin/top of an incoming application/letter instructing a subordinate section to execute a specific action immediately.
- Official Memo (Note for Decision): A written statement of facts, existing rules, financial implications, and proposed options initiated by a lower-level assistant (Sectional Clerk), verified with opinions by the Sectional Chief, and submitted upward to the Office Chief (or Departmental Minister/Board) to reach an official decision on a policy or administrative problem that is not covered by routine standing orders.
Things to Remember (Unit 4 Summary)
- Correspondence provides legal evidence, clarity, and economy in written communication.
- Commercial correspondence follows the logical sequence: Inquiry → Quotation → Order → Confirmation → Complaint/Adjustment.
- The Entry Book records incoming mail, while the Dispatch Book records outgoing mail.
- Circular distributes one instruction to many branches; A Mandatory Order is a binding order from a superior to a subordinate; An Official Memo moves upward from lower staff to higher authority to obtain a formal decision.
Exercises (Unit 4)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Define office correspondence.
- When is a quotation letter written?
- What is meant by Mail Entry (Incoming Registration) and Mail Dispatch (Outgoing Registration)?
- Name the two types of circulars.
- What is a Mandatory Order?
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Explain any six essential qualities of a good letter.
- Draw neat specimen formats of an Entry Book and a Dispatch Book showing all columns.
- Differentiate between a Circular and a Notice.
C. Long Practical / Drafting Questions (8 Marks Each)
- Describe the eight structural parts of a standard business letter with a neat layout diagram.
- Draft an imaginary Order Letter on behalf of Bagmati High School, Gokarneshwor, Kathmandu to Janak Education Materials Centre, Bhaktapur, ordering 100 copies each of Grade 9 Accounting, Mathematics, and Science textbooks.
- Draft a job Application Letter with a complete Curriculum Vitae (Bio-data) applying for the vacant post of Accountant at Nepal Telecom, Central Office, Bhadrakali, Kathmandu.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 4 Solutions.
UNIT 5: RECORD KEEPING AND RECORD MANAGEMENT
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define a record, record keeping, and record management.
- Explain the objectives and importance of record management in an office.
- Classify records into four legal categories according to the Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S. of Nepal.
- Describe the fundamental principles of record management and the stages of the record management cycle.
5.1 Meaning of Record, Record Keeping, and Record Management
Every day, an office creates and receives hundreds of documents—letters, invoices, receipts, vouchers, contracts, audit reports, payroll sheets, and minutes. Any written or digital document preserved for future reference and evidence is called a Record.
- Record Keeping: The systematic art of collecting, classifying, filing, and preserving documents safely so they can be retrieved quickly whenever needed.
- Record Management: The complete administrative control over the entire lifecycle of records—from their creation/receipt, classification, storage, maintenance, and retrieval to their final retention or legal disposal.
“Record management in its broadest sense concerns itself with records creation, distribution, maintenance, retention, preservation, retrieval, and disposal.” — S.P. Arora
5.2 Objectives and Importance of Record Management
- Preserving Institutional Memory (Historical Function): Keeps an orderly account of the organization’s past transactions, decisions, and progress over time.
- Ascertaining True Financial Condition: Enables accountants to prepare accurate financial statements (Trial Balance, Profit & Loss Account, Balance Sheet) based on verified vouchers.
- Facilitating Inter-Period and Inter-Firm Comparison (Analytical Function): Allows managers to compare this year’s sales, costs, and profits with previous years or with competitors.
- Basis for Future Planning and Budgeting: Provides reliable historical data required to forecast future budgets and business strategies.
- Fulfilling Legal and Audit Requirements: Serves as indisputable documentary proof in courts of law, tax assessments, and statutory audits.
- Detecting Errors, Frauds, and Wastes (Control Function): Helps internal and external auditors trace discrepancies and prevent misuse of funds.
5.3 Classification and Disposal of Records in Nepal
Not all records have the same lifespan. Keeping expired, useless papers forever wastes expensive office space, filing cabinets, and clerical time. In government offices of Nepal, records are classified and disposed of according to the Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S. into four distinct categories:
| Category of Record | Retention Period | Nature of Documents & Examples |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Very Important Records (Permanent Records) | Preserved Forever (Permanent) | Documents of permanent national, legal, or constitutional value: International treaties, national border maps, acts and regulations, royal/presidential seals, land ownership Title Deeds, company memorandum/articles of association, court judgments, and peace/security agreements |
| 2. Important Records | 5 to 10 years (until final audit and legal settlement are completed) | Documents relating to financial administration, contracts, and audits: Tax invoices, purchase/sales ledgers, cash books, annual financial statements, audit reports, construction tender contracts, and loan agreements |
| 3. Useful Records | 1 to 5 years from the date of creation | Documents of temporary administrative utility: Ordinary inter-office correspondence, routine bank statements, leave applications, circular letters, and annual budget estimates after final audit |
| 4. Useless Records (Routine Records) | Destroyed immediately after reading/action or within 1 year | Documents that lose utility immediately after communication: Festival greeting cards (New Year or holiday wishes), wedding/ceremony invitations, condolence messages, routine acknowledgments, and rough drafts |
5.4 Principles of Record Management and the Record Cycle
Five Core Principles of Record Management
- Principle of Purpose: Every record preserved must have a clear administrative, financial, or legal purpose; keeping purposeless records wastes money and space.
- Principle of Classification: Records must be grouped logically (by subject, alphabet, number, geography, or chronology) through proper Filing and Indexing so they do not become a heap of confusion.
- Principle of Verification: Recorded facts must be supported by authentic source vouchers, signatures, and stamps so they can be verified during audits or legal disputes.
- Principle of Availability / Prompt Retrieval: Records must be stored in such a way that any required document can be located and retrieved within the shortest possible time.
- Principle of Economy and Safety: The cost of maintaining records should be reasonable, and vital documents must be protected against fire, moisture, pests, and cyber threats.
The Record Management Cycle
Every record passes through five sequential stages during its life:
- Creation / Receipt: Generating an internal document (voucher, report, letter) or receiving an external document.
- Classification & Filing: Registering in the Entry Book, indexing, and placing inside the appropriate file folder or digital directory.
- Active Use & Maintenance: Retrieving the record for daily reference, accounting, or decision-making and returning it safely.
- Inactive Storage / Archiving: Moving older records that are rarely needed from active office desks to a central record room or archive.
- Retention or Legal Disposal: Preserving permanent records indefinitely while shredding or burning expired records under the supervision of an official committee as per the Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S.
Things to Remember (Unit 5 Summary)
- Record Management governs the creation, classification, storage, retrieval, and disposal of official documents.
- Under Nepal’s Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S., records are classified into Very Important (Permanent / 15+ years), Important (5–10 years), Useful (1–5 years), and Useless (disposed after use / within 1 year).
- The five core principles of record management are Purpose, Classification, Verification, Availability, and Economy and Safety.
Exercises (Unit 5)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Define a record in one sentence.
- Which regulation governs the disposal of records in government offices of Nepal?
- What is the retention period of Important Records and Useful Records?
- Give two examples of Very Important (Permanent) Records.
- Give two examples of Useless Records.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- What is record management? Explain its four main objectives.
- Explain any four principles of record management.
- Describe the stages of the Record Management Cycle.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- What is meant by disposal of records? Explain the four types of records based on their utility and retention period under the Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 5 Solutions.
UNIT 6: POSTAL AND ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SERVICES
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define communication and explain the methods of communication management in an office.
- Trace the historical development of Postal Services in Nepal (from the General Post Office in 1878 A.D. to Universal Postal Union membership and modern e-Post / EMS).
- Explain the importance of postal services to the government, business organizations, and individuals.
- Describe the six traditional methods of sending mail through the post office and differentiate between Ordinary Letter and Registered Letter.
- Explain the meaning, tools, and importance of Information Technology (IT) and Electronic Communication Services (Email, Internet, Website, Multimedia, Social Media, Video Conferencing, and Fax) in modern offices.
6.1 Concept and Importance of Communication in an Office
Communication is the process of exchanging facts, ideas, orders, reports, and emotions between two or more persons or organizations to create mutual understanding. In an office, communication may be Internal (upward, downward, and horizontal communication among staff and departments) or External (with customers, suppliers, banks, and government bodies), and is transmitted through Oral, Written, or Electronic/Visual channels.
6.2 Postal Services and Historical Development in Nepal
Postal Service is the oldest, most widespread, and most affordable government-operated network for collecting, sorting, transporting, and delivering letters, postcards, printed books, parcels, and money orders across the country and around the world.
Timeline of Postal Service Development in Nepal
| Year | Historical Milestone in Nepal’s Postal System |
|---|---|
| Ancient & Medieval Era | Royal messengers and foot runners carried official state decrees across hill trails. |
| 1935 B.S. (1878 A.D.) | General Post Office (Central Post Office) was formally established in Kathmandu during the reign of King Surendra / Prime Minister Ranodip Singh, opening postal services to the public for the first time. Within 3 years, 43 post offices were established across Nepal. |
| 1938 B.S. (1881 A.D.) | First Nepali Postage Stamps of small fractional denominations (in the royal crown and crossed-swords design) were printed and introduced, replacing cash payment for postage. |
| 2007 B.S. (1951 A.D.) | Following the advent of democracy, 124 post offices were operating in Nepal; rapid nationwide expansion began under the Five-Year Development Plans, eventually growing to nearly 4,000 post offices (General Post Office, Regional Post Offices, District Post Offices, Area Post Offices, and Additional Post Offices). |
| 11 October 1956 A.D. | Nepal became a full member of the Universal Postal Union (UPU), connecting Nepal’s domestic postal network directly to international mail routes worldwide. |
| 2031 B.S. (1974 A.D.) | Nepal signed the UPU Parcel Post Agreement, enabling international parcel delivery. |
| 2039 B.S. (1982 A.D.) | Nepal joined the Asian-Pacific Postal Union (APPU). |
| 2049 B.S. (1992 A.D.) & 2061 B.S. (2004 A.D.) | Enactment of the National Communication Policy, 1992, introduction of Express Mail Service (EMS), Postal Saving Bank, Money Order, Tele-centers, and Postal Payment Service Agreement (2004) under the Ministry of Communication and Information Technology. |
6.3 Importance of Postal Service
- For the Government: Circulates government acts, official gazettes, circulars, election materials, and official letters from federal ministries in Kathmandu to provincial, district, and rural local offices, while generating non-tax revenue through stamp sales.
- For Business Organizations: Carries commercial inquiries, quotations, invoices, product samples, book posts, and parcels between traders and customers across remote markets, and facilitates small remittances via Money Orders.
- For Individuals: Provides an affordable, accessible medium for citizens in every corner of the country to receive citizenship documents, passports, university transcripts, appointment letters, and personal parcels.
6.4 Methods of Sending Letters and Articles Through Post
Nepal Post offers six traditional methods for dispatching written messages and packages (1–6 below), plus the modern Express Mail Service (7):
- Ordinary Letter: Used for routine, non-confidential personal or official messages. Requires only the minimum standard postage stamp; the post office does not issue a receipt or bear legal liability if lost in transit.
- Registered Letter: Used for urgent, confidential, or legally important documents (cheques, bank drafts, legal notices, land deeds, appointment letters). The sender pays an additional registration charge over the normal postage, the envelope is stamped “Registered Post”, and the post office issues an official Receipt and records delivery upon the addressee’s signature (with an optional Acknowledgment Due / A.D. card returned to the sender).
- Post Card: The cheapest open card issued by the post office with a pre-printed postage stamp on one side. Because it is not enclosed in an envelope, anyone can read the message—making it suitable only for brief, non-confidential messages.
- Aerogramme: A lightweight, pre-stamped foldable sheet of paper sold by the post office for sending airmail messages. Once folded and gummed on three sides, it forms its own envelope. No enclosures (extra paper, photos, or cheques) are permitted inside an aerogramme; if anything is enclosed, double postage is penalized.
- Book Post: Used for mailing printed books, magazines, journals, newspapers, examination forms, and wedding/invitation cards at a concessional postage rate lower than sealed letters. The envelope or wrapper must be left unsealed (closed only with a flap or string) so postal staff can inspect that no personal correspondence is hidden inside, and must be marked “Book Post” on the cover.
- Parcel Post: Used for sending merchandise, gifts, product samples, and heavy packets across domestic or international routes. Parcels are packed securely in cloth or cardboard boxes, sealed, and charged according to weight and destination distance.
- Express Mail Service (EMS): A modern high-speed courier service operated by Nepal Post that delivers urgent documents and merchandise to major cities in Nepal and over 40 foreign countries with tracking numbers and time-bound delivery guarantees.
Comparison Between Ordinary Letter and Registered Letter
| Basis of Difference | Ordinary Letter | Registered Letter |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Nature of Message | Suitable for simple, routine, and non-urgent messages | Suitable for important, urgent, legal, and confidential documents |
| 2. Recording at Post Office | Not recorded individually in the post office register; dropped directly into the letterbox | Handed over at the postal counter and formally recorded in the post office register |
| 3. Postage Cost | Economical; requires only the minimum basic postage stamp | Costlier; requires an additional registration fee on top of normal postage |
| 4. Proof of Posting (Receipt) | The post office does not issue any receipt to the sender | The post office immediately issues an official Receipt as legal proof of posting |
| 5. Responsibility & Compensation | The post office bears no liability if the letter is lost or damaged in transit | The post office tracks delivery, takes the receiver’s signature, and bears responsibility for safe delivery |
6.5 Electronic Communication Services and Information Technology (IT)
In the 21st century, Information and Communication Technology (ICT) has revolutionized office operations. Electronic communication transfers text, audio, images, video, and accounting files instantaneously across the globe via digital networks.
Major Means of Electronic Communication in Modern Offices
- Electronic Mail (E-mail): Instant digital mail transmitted over the internet to one or many recipients simultaneously, supporting attachments such as PDF invoices, spreadsheets, and scanned documents at virtually zero marginal cost.
- Internet and Organizational Websites: A global network of interconnected computers (World Wide Web) through which offices publish official notices, annual reports, e-bidding tenders, and online customer portals (e.g.,
www.moecdc.gov.np,www.ird.gov.np). - Teleconferencing and Video Conferencing (Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams): Enables executives, branch managers, and clients across different districts or countries to hold face-to-face virtual meetings, share screens, and make decisions without travel expenses.
- Online Media, Multimedia, and Social Networking: Digital platforms used by modern organizations for public notices, customer service, digital marketing, and stakeholder engagement—requiring strict adherence to Nepal’s Electronic Transactions Act, 2063 B.S. to prevent cybercrime and data misuse.
- Facsimile (Fax): A telecommunication device connected to a telephone line that optically scans a printed document (including signatures and stamps) and transmits an exact facsimile copy to a receiving fax machine within seconds.
Things to Remember (Unit 6 Summary)
- Formal postal service in Nepal began with the General Post Office in 1935 B.S. (1878 A.D.), first postage stamps were issued in 1938 B.S. (1881 A.D.), and Nepal joined the Universal Postal Union (UPU) on 11 October 1956.
- The six postal mail methods are Ordinary Letter, Registered Letter, Post Card, Aerogramme, Book Post, and Parcel Post (plus modern EMS).
- Modern offices combine traditional postal dispatch with IT communication tools (Email, Websites, Video Conferencing, Digital Portals) for speed, economy, and global reach.
Exercises (Unit 6)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- When was the General Post Office established in Nepal, and when were the first postage stamps issued?
- On what date did Nepal become a member of the Universal Postal Union (UPU)?
- Why are enclosures not allowed inside an Aerogramme?
- Why is a Book Post envelope left unsealed?
- Write the full form of EMS and ICT.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Explain the importance of postal service to the government, business firms, and individuals.
- State five differences between an Ordinary Letter and a Registered Letter.
- What is electronic communication service? Explain the role of Email, Internet Websites, and Video Conferencing in a modern office.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- Trace the historical development of postal service in Nepal and explain the different methods of sending letters and parcels through the post office.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 6 Solutions.
UNIT 7: BUSINESS — CONCEPT, EVOLUTION, TYPES, AND AUXILIARIES
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define business and explain its essential characteristics and economic importance.
- Trace the historical evolution of business from the barter system to modern digital commerce.
- Classify business activities into Industry (Primary, Secondary, Tertiary/Service) and Commerce (Trade and Auxiliaries/Aids to Trade).
- Differentiate between Home (Internal) Trade and Foreign (International) Trade.
- Understand the basic concept of Business Taxation in Nepal (PAN, Direct vs. Indirect Tax, and VAT fundamentals).
7.1 Meaning, Definition, and Characteristics of Business
Literally, the word Business means the state of “being busy.” In economics and accounting, however, not every human activity is business. Cooking food for one’s own family is a non-economic activity driven by love and affection, whereas cooking and selling food in a restaurant for money is an economic business activity.
Business is defined as any lawful, regular human economic activity directed toward producing, purchasing, and selling goods and services with the primary objective of earning profit and acquiring wealth through customer satisfaction.
“Business may be defined as a human activity directed towards producing or acquiring wealth through buying and selling of goods.” — L.H. Haney
“The whole complex field of commerce and industry—the basic industries, processing and manufacturing industries, and the network of ancillary services: distribution, banking, insurance, transport, and so on—which serve and interpenetrate the world of business as a whole, are business.” — F.C. Hooper
Essential Characteristics (Features) of Business
- Human Economic Activity: Performed by human beings to earn a livelihood and create monetary wealth (excludes charity or hobbies).
- Production and Exchange of Goods and Services: Involves either manufacturing/extracting goods (Industry) or buying and selling goods/services for value (Commerce). Self-consumption is not business.
- Regularity and Continuity in Dealings: A single isolated transaction (such as selling one’s old personal motorcycle) is not business; buying and selling motorcycles regularly in a showroom is business.
- Profit Motive: The primary driving force of every business is earning a surplus of revenue over cost (profit) for survival and growth.
- Risk and Uncertainty: Every business faces uncertainties such as changes in customer taste, price fluctuations, competition, natural disasters, and fire, meaning loss is always possible.
- Creation of Utilities and Customer Satisfaction: Business creates form utility (through manufacturing), place utility (through transport), and time utility (through warehousing) to satisfy human wants.
- Legality: The activity must be lawful under the laws of the country (smuggling, black-marketing, or gambling is not legitimate business).
7.2 Classification of Business Activities: Industry and Commerce
All business activities are classified into two broad branches: 1. Industry and 2. Commerce.
| Major Branch | Sub-Division | Specific Categories & Activities |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Industry (Production & Form Utility) | Primary Industry | • Genetic Industry: Poultry farming, cattle breeding, fish farming (pisciculture), plant nurseries • Extractive Industry: Mining, quarrying, forestry/timber, herb collection |
| 1. Industry | Secondary Industry | • Manufacturing Industry: Analytical (oil refinery), Synthetical (cement), Processing (tea, sugar, paper), Assembling (computers, vehicles) • Construction Industry: Hydropower dams, roads, bridges, commercial buildings |
| 1. Industry | Tertiary / Service Industry | • Hotels & hospitality, tourism & trekking, airlines, banking, healthcare, IT & software services |
| 2. Commerce (Distribution of Goods) | (A) Trade | • Home (Internal) Trade: Wholesale Trade and Retail Trade within national borders • Foreign (International) Trade: Import Trade, Export Trade, and Entrepôt (Re-export) Trade |
| 2. Commerce | (B) Auxiliaries to Trade | • Transportation (removes hindrance of place) • Warehousing (removes hindrance of time) • Banking & Finance (removes hindrance of capital/payment) • Insurance (removes hindrance of risk) • Advertising & Communication (removes hindrance of information) |
1. Industry
Industry refers to economic activities connected with the extraction, reproduction, conversion, processing, and construction of raw materials into finished or semi-finished goods (creation of form utility):
- Primary Industry:
- Extractive Industry: Extracting natural resources from the earth, water, or air (e.g., mining, quarrying, fishing, timber collection, herb gathering in Nepal’s Himalayas).
- Genetic Industry: Breeding and multiplying plants and animals for sale (e.g., poultry farming, cattle breeding, pisciculture/fish farming, plant nurseries, horticulture).
- Secondary Industry:
- Manufacturing Industry: Converting raw materials into finished products using machines and labor—including Analytical (crude oil into petrol/diesel), Synthetical (limestone, gypsum, and coal into cement), Processing (sugarcane into sugar, tea leaves into orthodox tea, jute into sacks), and Assembling (assembling parts into computers, televisions, or vehicles).
- Construction Industry: Building physical infrastructure using manufactured materials (e.g., constructing hydropower dams, roads, bridges, tunnels, and commercial buildings).
- Tertiary / Service Industry: Providing intangible commercial services such as hospitality/hotels, tourism and trekking agencies, aviation, hospitals, and software development.
2. Commerce
Commerce encompasses all activities that remove the hindrances of person, place, time, finance, risk, and information in transferring goods from the place of production (factories/farms) to the ultimate consumers. Commerce consists of two parts: (A) Trade and (B) Auxiliaries (Aids) to Trade:
Commerce = Trade + Auxiliaries to Trade
(A) Trade
Trade means the actual buying and selling (exchange) of goods and services for money or money’s worth between buyers and sellers. Trade is classified into:
- Home / Internal / Domestic Trade: Buying and selling of goods within the geographical boundaries of the same country (e.g., tea produced in Ilam sold in Kathmandu or Pokhara), settled in domestic currency (NPR):
- Wholesale Trade: Buying goods in large bulk quantities directly from manufacturers/producers and selling in smaller lots to retailers.
- Retail Trade: Buying goods in small quantities from wholesalers and selling directly to ultimate consumers in local shops, department stores, or supermarkets.
- Foreign / International / External Trade: Buying and selling of goods and services across national borders between two or more countries, involving foreign currency, customs duties, and Letters of Credit (L/C):
- Import Trade: Purchasing goods from a foreign country into one’s own country (e.g., Nepal importing petroleum products from India or machinery from China/Japan).
- Export Trade: Selling domestically produced goods to foreign countries (e.g., Nepal exporting hand-knotted carpets, pashmina, cardamom, orthodox tea, and electricity).
- Entrepôt / Re-export Trade: Importing goods from one country not for domestic consumption, but for processing/re-packing and exporting them to a third country (e.g., a Singapore or Dubai trading hub importing goods from Country A and exporting them to Country B).
(B) Auxiliaries (Aids) to Trade
Activities that facilitate smooth trade by removing specific commercial hindrances:
| Auxiliary Service | Hindrance Removed | How It Facilitates Business & Trade |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Transportation | Hindrance of Place | Moves raw materials to factories and finished goods to distant markets (creates place utility). |
| 2. Warehousing | Hindrance of Time | Stores seasonal products (like paddy, potatoes, or woolen garments) safely until consumer demand arises (creates time utility). |
| 3. Banking & Finance | Hindrance of Finance & Payment | Provides working capital loans, overdrafts, cheques, remittances, and Letters of Credit (L/C) for international trade. |
| 4. Insurance | Hindrance of Risk | Protects traders against financial loss from fire, marine/transit accidents, theft, and natural calamities in exchange for a periodic premium. |
| 5. Advertising & Communication | Hindrance of Information / Knowledge | Informs consumers about product availability, features, prices, and uses while enabling instant trade negotiation. |
7.3 Fundamentals of Business Taxation in Nepal
Every registered business in Nepal contributes to national revenue through taxation administered by the Inland Revenue Department (IRD):
- Permanent Account Number (PAN): A unique 9-digit taxpayer identification number issued by the IRD that is mandatory for every business, company, and salaried professional in Nepal.
- Direct Tax: A tax whose incidence and burden fall on the very same person or business—such as Corporate Income Tax, Individual/Proprietorship Income Tax, Remuneration Tax, and Property/Vehicle Tax.
- Indirect Tax: A tax levied on goods and services whose burden is shifted to the final consumer—such as Value Added Tax (VAT — standard rate 13% in Nepal), Excise Duty, and Customs Duty.
Things to Remember (Unit 7 Summary)
- Business combines Industry (production of goods and services) and Commerce (distribution of goods and services).
- Commerce equals Trade (Home Trade + Foreign Trade) plus Auxiliaries to Trade (Transport, Warehousing, Banking, Insurance, and Advertising).
- Home Trade includes Wholesale and Retail trade; Foreign Trade includes Import, Export, and Entrepôt trade.
Exercises (Unit 7)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Define business in one sentence.
- What is meant by Entrepôt Trade?
- Write the equation connecting Commerce, Trade, and Auxiliaries to Trade.
- Which hindrance of trade is removed by (a) Warehousing and (b) Insurance?
- Write the full form of PAN and VAT, and state the standard rate of VAT in Nepal.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Explain any five essential characteristics of business.
- Differentiate between Industry, Commerce, and Trade.
- Distinguish between Home Trade and Foreign Trade on any four bases.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- What is meant by Auxiliaries to Trade? Explain how transportation, warehousing, banking, insurance, and advertising help in the smooth operation of commerce.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 7 Solutions.
UNIT 8: FORMS OF BUSINESS ORGANIZATION
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Identify and compare the six major forms of business organizations operating in Nepal:
- Sole Trading Concern
- Partnership Firm
- Joint Stock Company (Private Ltd. and Public Ltd.)
- Public Enterprises
- Cooperative Society
- Multinational Companies (MNCs)
- Explain the meaning, features, advantages, disadvantages, and legal registration procedures of each form in the context of Nepal.
8.1 Overview of Business Ownership Structures in Nepal
A business enterprise can be owned and managed by a single individual, a group of partners, thousands of shareholders, the state, or a cooperative community.
| Form of Organization | Governing Act in Nepal | Ownership & Membership | Liability of Owners | Primary Motive & Examples in Nepal |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Sole Trading Concern | Private Firm Registration Act, 2014 B.S. | Owned and managed by 1 single individual (Sole Proprietor) | Unlimited Liability (personal property can be attached to pay business debts) | Profit earning; local grocery stores, stationery shops, pharmacies, tailoring houses |
| 2. Partnership Firm | Partnership Act, 2020 B.S. | Owned by two or more partners bound by a Partnership Deed | Unlimited Liability (jointly and severally liable for firm’s debts) | Profit sharing; law firms, audit firms, joint trading concerns |
| 3. Joint Stock Company | Companies Act, 2063 B.S. | Private Ltd. (Pvt. Ltd.): 1 to 101 shareholders; Public Ltd. (Ltd.): Minimum 7 to unlimited shareholders | Limited Liability (limited strictly to the face value of shares subscribed) | Profit & wealth maximization; Pvt. Ltd.: Chaudhary Group units, Pathao Nepal; Public Ltd.: Nabil Bank Ltd., Nepal Telecom Ltd. |
| 4. Public Enterprise | Corporation Act, 2021 B.S., Companies Act, or Special Acts | Owned wholly or majority (>50% share) by the Government of Nepal | Limited to government capital investment | Public welfare with commercial self-reliance; Nepal Electricity Authority (NEA), Nepal Oil Corporation (NOC), Dairy Development Corporation (DDC) |
| 5. Cooperative Society | Cooperative Act, 2074 B.S. | At least 30 members (15 for labour- or skill-based cooperatives; 100 for savings and credit cooperatives in metropolitan and sub-metropolitan cities) sharing a common economic bond | Limited Liability (limited to shares held by each member) | Mutual self-help (“Each for all and all for each”) and service over profit; Public Transport Cooperative, Milk Producers’ Cooperatives, Saving & Credit Cooperatives |
| 6. Multinational Company (MNC) | Foreign Investment and Technology Transfer Act (FITTA), 2075 B.S. & Companies Act | Headquarters in home country with subsidiaries/branches in multiple host countries | Limited Liability | Global market expansion & profit; Unilever Nepal Ltd., Dabur Nepal Pvt. Ltd., Ncell Axiata, Coca-Cola (Bottlers Nepal Ltd.), Standard Chartered Bank Nepal |
8.2 Detailed Study of Each Form of Business Organization
1. Sole Trading Concern
A Sole Trading Concern is the oldest and simplest form of business organization, owned, financed, managed, and controlled by a single individual who receives all profits and bears all risks alone. In Nepal, it is registered with the Department of Commerce, Supplies and Consumer Protection, Department of Cottage and Small Industries, or Local Ward/Municipal Office under the Private Firm Registration Act, 2014 B.S.
- Merits (Advantages): Easy and inexpensive formation and dissolution; quick decision-making without consulting others; complete secrecy of business accounts and formulas; direct personal contact with customers; strong personal incentive since 100% of profit belongs to the proprietor.
- Demerits (Disadvantages): Unlimited liability (if business assets are insufficient to pay creditors, the proprietor’s personal house and land can be sold); limited capital and borrowing capacity; limited managerial skill of one person; uncertain continuity (illness, insolvency, or death of the owner may close the business).
2. Partnership Firm
A Partnership Firm is an association of two or more persons who pool their capital, labor, and skill under a written agreement (Partnership Deed) to carry on a lawful business and share profits and losses in an agreed ratio. In Nepal, it is governed by the Partnership Act, 2020 B.S.
“Partnership is the relation between persons who have agreed to share the profits of a business carried on by all or any of them acting for all.” — Partnership Act
- Merits (Advantages): Larger capital accumulation than sole trading; combined managerial skills and balanced judgment (“two heads are better than one”); sharing of business risks and losses among all partners; flexible operation.
- Demerits (Disadvantages): Unlimited joint and several liability; risk of delay in decisions and internal disputes/distrust among partners; non-transferability of partnership share without unanimous consent; instability upon the death, retirement, or insolvency of a partner.
3. Joint Stock Company
A Joint Stock Company is a voluntary association of individuals formed for profit, having a separate legal entity, perpetual succession, a common seal, and capital divided into transferable units called Shares. The holders of shares are called Shareholders, and their liability is limited to the nominal value of the shares they hold. In Nepal, companies are incorporated at the Office of the Company Registrar under the Companies Act, 2063 B.S.
“A company is an artificial person created by law, having separate entity with a perpetual succession and a common seal.” — Prof. L.H. Haney
Differences Between Private Limited Company and Public Limited Company in Nepal
| Basis of Comparison | Private Limited Company (Pvt. Ltd.) | Public Limited Company (Ltd.) |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Number of Shareholders | Minimum 1 and maximum 101 shareholders (as per amended Companies Act, 2063 B.S.) | Minimum 7 shareholders and no upper limit (maximum unlimited) |
| 2. Invitation to Public (Prospectus) | Strictly prohibited from issuing a Prospectus to invite the general public to buy shares or debentures | Can issue a Prospectus (IPO / FPO) inviting the general public to subscribe to its shares and debentures |
| 3. Transferability of Shares | Transfer of shares is restricted by its Articles of Association | Shares are freely transferable and traded on the Nepal Stock Exchange (NEPSE) |
| 4. Minimum Paid-up Capital | No statutory high floor (as determined by promoters in Memorandum) | Minimum Rs. 1,00,00,000 (Rs. 10 Million) under the Companies Act (higher for banks/insurers as per NRB/NIA) |
| 5. Number of Directors | As specified in the Articles of Association (up to 11 directors) | Minimum 3 to 11 directors, including at least one independent director and female representation |
| 6. Name Suffix | Must write “Private Limited (Pvt. Ltd.)” at the end of its name | Must write “Limited (Ltd.)” at the end of its name |
4. Public Enterprises
Public Enterprises (State-Owned Enterprises) are autonomous commercial or industrial undertakings established, owned (wholly or with more than 50% equity share), and controlled by the Government of Nepal to provide essential public utilities (electricity, water, telecom, petroleum, dairy, aviation) at fair prices while operating on sound commercial principles.
- Examples across Nepal’s 6 Sectors: Industrial: Dairy Development Corporation (DDC), Udayapur Cement Industry; Trading: Nepal Oil Corporation (NOC), Food Management and Trading Company; Service: Nepal Airlines Corporation (NAC); Social: Janak Education Materials Centre (JEMC), Gorkhapatra Corporation; Public Utility: Nepal Electricity Authority (NEA), Nepal Telecom; Financial: National Commercial Bank, Agricultural Development Bank, National Insurance Corporation.
5. Cooperative Society
A Cooperative Society is a voluntary, democratic, autonomous association of people (especially small farmers, artisans, workers, and middle-income citizens) who unite on the principle of equality (one member, one vote) and mutual self-help to promote their common economic, social, and cultural interests without exploitation by middlemen. In Nepal, cooperatives are regulated under the Cooperative Act, 2074 B.S. and follow the seven international Rochdale principles (Open & Voluntary Membership, Democratic Member Control, Member Economic Participation, Autonomy, Education/Training, Cooperation among Cooperatives, and Concern for Community).
6. Multinational Companies (MNCs)
A Multinational Company (MNC)—also called a Transnational Corporation—is a giant corporate enterprise that has its registered headquarters in one country (the Home Country) and operates production plants, assembly units, or marketing subsidiaries across two or more other countries (the Host Countries).
- Features & Role in Nepal: Massive capital and financial strength; advanced technology and Research & Development (R&D); global brand recognition; professional management. In Nepal, MNCs such as Unilever Nepal Ltd., Dabur Nepal Pvt. Ltd., Bottlers Nepal Ltd. (Coca-Cola), Surya Nepal Pvt. Ltd., Asian Paints Nepal, and Standard Chartered Bank Nepal bring Foreign Direct Investment (FDI), transfer modern technology, generate employment, and contribute a substantial share of corporate tax revenue.
Things to Remember (Unit 8 Summary)
- Sole Trading and Partnership have unlimited liability, whereas Joint Stock Companies, Public Enterprises, Cooperatives, and MNCs enjoy limited liability and separate legal entity.
- In Nepal, a Private Limited Company has 1 to 101 shareholders and cannot invite public subscriptions, while a Public Limited Company requires at least 7 shareholders (no maximum limit) and can issue shares to the public via an IPO.
- Cooperative Societies operate on the democratic principle of “One Member, One Vote” regardless of the number of shares held.
Exercises (Unit 8)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- What is meant by unlimited liability in a Sole Trading Concern?
- What is a Partnership Deed?
- State the minimum and maximum number of shareholders in a Private Limited Company and a Public Limited Company in Nepal.
- Why is a Joint Stock Company called an artificial person created by law?
- Give two examples each of Public Enterprises and Multinational Companies operating in Nepal.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Explain four advantages and four disadvantages of a Sole Trading Concern.
- Differentiate between a Sole Trading Concern and a Partnership Firm.
- What is a Cooperative Society? Explain any four features of a cooperative organization in Nepal.
- Define a Multinational Company (MNC) and state four characteristics of MNCs.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- Define a Joint Stock Company. Explain its main characteristics and differentiate between a Private Limited Company and a Public Limited Company on any six bases.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 8 Solutions.
UNIT 9: ASSEMBLY, MEETING, CONFERENCE, AND SEMINAR
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define and distinguish between an Assembly, Meeting, Conference, and Seminar.
- Classify and explain the major Types of Meetings (Regular/Committee Meeting, Urgent/Emergency Meeting, Annual General Meeting, Extraordinary General Meeting, Board/Executive Meeting, Multi-Lateral Meeting, and Secret Meeting).
- Explain the essential requisites of a valid meeting: Notice, Agenda, and Quorum.
- Define Minutes of a Meeting and draft a complete, realistic Minute along with its Endorsement / Confirmation.
9.1 Meaning of Assembly, Meeting, Conference, and Seminar
Organizations make collective decisions and share ideas through structured gatherings:
| Type of Gathering | Nature, Participants & Purpose | Examples |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Assembly | A large formal gathering of all general members, shareholders, citizens, or students to hear announcements, elect representatives, or approve broad policies | School Morning Assembly, Municipal Assembly, General Assembly of a Cooperative or NGO |
| 2. Meeting | A formal gathering of two or more authorized members of a committee, board, or organization at a pre-notified date, time, and venue with a specific Agenda to discuss issues and pass binding Resolutions | Board of Directors Meeting, School Management Committee (SMC) Meeting, Departmental Staff Meeting |
| 3. Conference | A large-scale, often multi-day formal convention bringing together delegates from various branches, professions, or nations to deliberate on broad regional, national, or global themes | SAARC Summit, National Teachers’ Conference, International Climate Change Conference |
| 4. Seminar / Workshop | An academic, technical, or professional gathering where subject-matter experts present research papers (Working Papers) on a specific topic, followed by interactive discussion and conclusions | Seminar on New Government Accounting System (CGAS) for accountants, SEE Curriculum Orientation Workshop |
9.2 Types of Meetings
Depending on frequency, participants, and legal requirements, meetings are classified into the following major types:
- Regular / Committee / Periodic Meeting: Held at fixed, pre-scheduled intervals (e.g., weekly, monthly, or quarterly) as prescribed by organizational rules to review ongoing work and approve routine expenditures.
- Urgent / Emergency Meeting: Convened at very short notice whenever an unexpected crisis, natural disaster, or urgent policy matter arises that cannot wait until the next regular meeting.
- Board / Executive Committee Meeting: Held by the elected Board of Directors of a company or Executive Committee of an institution to formulate strategies, appoint senior staff, and approve budgets.
- Annual General Meeting — AGM: A statutory meeting held once every fiscal year by a Joint Stock Company, Cooperative, or registered association in which all shareholders/members participate to:
- Approve the Annual Financial Statements (Balance Sheet and Profit & Loss Account) and Auditor’s Report.
- Declare Dividends to shareholders.
- Elect members of the Board of Directors.
- Appoint the Statutory Auditor for the upcoming fiscal year and fix their remuneration.
- Extraordinary / Special General Meeting — EGM: Convened by the Board of Directors (or on the written requisition of a specified percentage of shareholders) between two Annual General Meetings to decide urgent special business—such as amending the Memorandum/Articles of Association, issuing bonus/right shares, or merging the company.
- Unilateral, Bilateral, and Multilateral Meetings:
- Unilateral: Internal meeting of members of a single department or organization.
- Bilateral: Meeting between representatives of two organizations or two countries (e.g., Nepal–India Commerce Secretary-level trade talks).
- Multilateral: Meeting involving representatives from three or more organizations or nations (e.g., BIMSTEC or WTO ministerial meetings).
- Secret / In-Camera Meeting: Held behind closed doors by top security officials, cabinet ministers, or central bank governors to decide highly sensitive matters (e.g., national security, monetary policy rates, or exam question moderation) whose minutes are kept strictly confidential until officially implemented.
9.3 Essential Requisites of a Valid Meeting
For the decisions (resolutions) of any meeting to be legally valid, three elements are indispensable:
- Pre-Notice of Meeting: A written notice informing all eligible members of the exact date, day, time, and venue of the meeting must be sent well in advance (e.g., 21 days’ notice for a company’s Annual General Meeting in Nepal).
- Agenda: An ordered list of specific topics or proposals to be discussed and decided in the meeting, circulated along with the meeting notice so members can come prepared.
- Quorum: The minimum percentage or number of eligible members who must be physically present at the meeting before proceedings can legally begin and pass valid resolutions (typically more than 50%, such as 51% or two-thirds of total members).
9.4 Minutes of a Meeting and Endorsement
Minutes are the official, concise, and chronological written record of the attendance, discussions, and final decisions (Resolutions) passed at a formal meeting, recorded in a bound Minute Book and signed by the Chairperson and all attending members.
Structure of a Standard Minute in Nepal
A formal Minute consists of four sequential sections:
- Heading / Preamble: States the date, day, time, venue, type of meeting, and the name and designation of the Chairperson presiding over the meeting.
- Attendance Record: Lists the names, designations, and signatures of all attending members, guests/invitees, and the member-secretary.
- Agendas for Discussion: Lists each numbered agenda item placed before the meeting.
- Resolutions / Decisions and Closing Signatures: Records the exact decision passed for each agenda item, followed by the closing note and signatures confirming the decisions.
Model Specimen of a School Management Committee (SMC) Meeting Minute
MINUTE OF THE REGULAR MEETING OF THE SCHOOL MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE
Today, on 2082 Magh 15, at 11:00 A.M., a regular meeting of the School Management Committee of Sunrise Model Secondary School, Gokarneshwor, Kathmandu was held in the Principal’s Office under the chairpersonship of SMC Chairperson Mr. Hari Prasad Sharma.
1. Attendance:
S.N. Name of the Member Designation Signature 1. Mr. Hari Prasad Sharma Chairperson H.P. Sharma 2. Mrs. Kamala Devi Rai Ward Representative Member K.D. Rai 3. Mr. Binod Kumar Thapa Guardians’ Representative B.K. Thapa 4. Mrs. Sunita Gurung Guardians’ Representative S. Gurung 5. Mr. Prakash Adhikari Teachers’ Representative P. Adhikari 6. Mr. Narayan Pokharel Principal & Member-Secretary N. Pokharel 2. Agendas for Discussion:
- Agenda No. 1: Regarding the purchase of 20 new desktop computers for the Secondary Computer & Accounting Lab.
- Agenda No. 2: Regarding the award of full tuition scholarships to meritorious and underprivileged students of Grade 9.
- Agenda No. 3: Miscellaneous.
3. Decisions / Resolutions Passed:
- Decision No. 1: After detailed discussion on Agenda No. 1, it was unanimously decided to purchase 20 sets of desktop computers within a budget ceiling of Rs. 12,00,000 by inviting sealed quotations as per the Financial Administration Rules, and to assign the responsibility of procurement coordination to Principal Mr. Narayan Pokharel and Teachers’ Representative Mr. Prakash Adhikari.
- Decision No. 2: Regarding Agenda No. 2, it was decided to grant a 100% monthly tuition fee scholarship to the top two rank-holders (one boy and one girl) of the Grade 8 final examination and three students from economically disadvantaged families verified by the Ward Office for the academic session 2082 B.S.
- Decision No. 3: As there were no other matters under Miscellaneous, the Chairperson thanked all attending members and declared the meeting adjourned at 1:15 P.M.
Signatures Confirming the Decisions:
(Signed by all 6 attending members and the Chairperson)
Endorsement / Confirmation of Minutes
When a major policy decision is taken by a board or general assembly, or when the minutes of a previous meeting are read out at the start of the next meeting to verify that they were recorded accurately without alteration, the formal approval and signing by the members/chairperson is called Endorsement / Confirmation of Minute.
Things to Remember (Unit 9 Summary)
- A Meeting requires a pre-circulated Notice, a specific Agenda, and a valid Quorum to pass binding resolutions.
- An Annual General Meeting (AGM) is held once every year, whereas an Extraordinary General Meeting (EGM) is called between two AGMs for urgent special business.
- Minutes record the Preamble (Date/Time/Venue/Chair), Attendance, Agendas, and Decisions (Resolutions) in a bound book.
Exercises (Unit 9)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Define a meeting in one sentence.
- What is meant by Agenda and Quorum of a meeting?
- Differentiate between an Assembly and a Seminar in two sentences.
- When is an Extraordinary General Meeting (EGM) convened?
- What is meant by Minute of a meeting?
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Explain any four types of meetings held in organizations.
- Differentiate between an Annual General Meeting (AGM) and an Extraordinary General Meeting (EGM).
- What is a Minute? Explain the importance of maintaining minutes of a meeting.
C. Long Practical / Drafting Questions (8 Marks Each)
- Draft a complete Minute of an imaginary meeting held at your school (or a local youth club) regarding the organization of the Annual Sports Week and Cultural Program, clearly showing the Preamble, Attendance, Agendas, and Decisions.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 9 Solutions.
UNIT 10: BOOKKEEPING AND ACCOUNTING
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define Bookkeeping and trace its historical evolution.
- Define Accounting and explain its objectives, functions, scope, and limitations.
- Analyze the interrelationship and differences between Bookkeeping and Accounting (“Accounting begins where bookkeeping ends”).
- Describe the major branches/types of accounting: Financial Accounting, Cost Accounting, Management Accounting, and Government Accounting.
- Explain the complete Accounting Process / Accounting Cycle.
10.1 Meaning and Evolution of Bookkeeping
Human memory is limited. A business proprietor cannot remember hundreds of daily cash receipts, credit purchases, credit sales, expenses, and bank transactions. The systematic, day-to-day art and science of recording financial transactions in the books of original entry and posting them into ledger accounts is called Bookkeeping.
Classical Definitions of Bookkeeping:
- “Bookkeeping is the art of recording business dealings in a set of books.” — J.R. Batliboi
- “Bookkeeping is the science and art of correctly recording in the books of account all those business transactions that result in the transfer of money or money’s worth.” — R.N. Carter
- “Bookkeeping is the art of recording business transactions in a systematic manner.” — A.N. Rosenkampff
Historical Evolution of Bookkeeping
- Ancient Civilization Stage: Clay tablets in Babylon and Assyria (c. 2600 B.C.), papyrus scrolls in Egypt, and Kautilya’s Arthashastra in ancient South Asia recorded royal taxes and tributes.
- Medieval Italian Merchant Stage (1494 A.D.): With the rise of maritime trade in Venice, Genoa, and Florence during the Renaissance, Franciscan friar and mathematician Fra Luca Pacioli published his famous mathematical treatise Summa de Arithmetica, Geometria, Proportioni et Proportionalita in Venice in 1494 A.D. Its section Particularis de Computis et Scripturis (“Details of Calculation and Recording”) formally codified the Double Entry System of Bookkeeping for the first time in history, earning Luca Pacioli the title “Father of Modern Bookkeeping and Accounting.”
- Industrial Revolution & Corporate Stage (18th–20th Century): The rise of Joint Stock Companies separated ownership (shareholders) from management (directors), giving birth to statutory auditing, Cost Accounting, Management Accounting, and Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP).
- Modern Digital & International Standards Stage (21st Century): Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) / Nepal Financial Reporting Standards (NFRS), computerized ERP accounting, and real-time cloud ledgers.
10.2 Meaning, Objectives, Functions, and Limitations of Accounting
While bookkeeping is confined to the routine recording and classification of transactions (Journal, Subsidiary Books, Ledger), Accounting is a broader analytical discipline that encompasses bookkeeping and extends to summarizing (Trial Balance, Trading & Profit and Loss Account, Balance Sheet), analyzing, interpreting, and communicating the financial results to internal and external decision-makers.
“Accounting is the art of recording, classifying, and summarizing in a significant manner and in terms of money, transactions and events which are, in part at least, of a financial character, and interpreting the results thereof.” — American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA)
Main Objectives and Functions of Accounting
- Maintaining Complete and Systematic Records: Replaces human memory by recording all monetary transactions chronologically and scientifically.
- Ascertaining Profit or Loss (Operating Result): Prepares the Income Statement (Trading and Profit & Loss Account) at the end of the fiscal year to determine whether the business earned a Net Profit or suffered a Net Loss.
- Depicting True Financial Position: Prepares the Balance Sheet on the closing date of the fiscal year to show exact balances of Assets, Liabilities, and Capital.
- Assessing Liquidity and Solvency: Tracks cash flows, debtors (receivables), and creditors (payables) so the firm can meet its short-term and long-term obligations on time.
- Communicating Financial Information to Users: Supplies reliable financial reports to Internal Users (Owners, Board of Directors, Managers, Employees) and External Users (Banks/Lenders, Investors, Creditors, Inland Revenue Department/Tax Authorities, Researchers).
- Preventing and Detecting Errors and Frauds: Facilitates internal check and statutory auditing through the Trial Balance and voucher verification.
Limitations of Accounting
- Records Only Monetary Transactions: Qualitative strengths such as employee honesty, managerial skill, customer loyalty, or industrial harmony are ignored because they cannot be measured in money (Money Measurement limitation).
- Based on Historical Cost (Ignores Price-Level Changes): Fixed assets are recorded at their original purchase price rather than current market/inflation-adjusted replacement value.
- Influenced by Personal Judgments and Estimates: Estimating useful life for depreciation or provision for doubtful debts involves subjective judgment.
- Possibility of Window Dressing (Manipulation): Unethical management may temporarily manipulate figures to make the Balance Sheet look stronger than reality.
10.3 Interrelationship and Differences Between Bookkeeping and Accounting
Bookkeeping and accounting are complementary stages of the same financial information system. Bookkeeping provides the raw foundation (Journal and Ledger) upon which the superstructure of Accounting (Trial Balance, Final Accounts, and Financial Analysis) is built. Hence, it is rightly said: “Accounting begins where bookkeeping ends.”
| Basis of Comparison | Bookkeeping | Accounting |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Scope & Stage | Primary stage and narrower in scope; limited to identifying, recording (Journal/Subsidiary Books), and classifying (Ledger) financial transactions | Secondary stage and wider in scope; includes bookkeeping and extends to summarizing (Trial Balance & Final Accounts), analyzing, interpreting, and communicating results |
| 2. Core Objective | To maintain systematic, chronological, and permanent records of all day-to-day financial transactions | To ascertain the net profit/loss and financial position of the business and communicate insights to decision-makers |
| 3. Nature of Job | Routine, clerical, and repetitive in nature | Analytical, executive, and interpretive in nature |
| 4. Personnel & Skill Required | Performed by a Junior Clerk / Bookkeeper requiring basic knowledge of debit and credit rules | Performed by a Senior Accountant / Chartered Accountant requiring thorough expertise in accounting standards (NFRS/GAAP), tax laws, and financial analysis |
| 5. Financial Statements | Financial statements (Trading, P&L Account, Balance Sheet) are not prepared as part of bookkeeping | Preparation and interpretation of Final Accounts and Financial Statements is the core output of accounting |
| 6. Decision-Making Role | Management cannot take strategic decisions directly from raw bookkeeping ledgers alone | Management relies directly on accounting statements and ratios to formulate plans, budgets, and policies |
10.4 Branches (Types) of Accounting
- Financial Accounting: Records historical business transactions to prepare the Trial Balance, Income Statement (Trading & P&L A/c), and Balance Sheet for external and internal stakeholders.
- Cost Accounting: Identifies, classifies, allocates, and controls the per-unit and total cost of manufacturing a product or rendering a service (material cost, labor cost, and overhead expenses) to fix selling prices and reduce waste.
- Management Accounting: Uses financial and cost data alongside tools like ratio analysis, budgeting, break-even (CVP) analysis, and cash flow statements to assist internal management in future planning, policy formulation, and decision-making.
- Government Accounting: Maintains records of public revenue, budget appropriations, and public expenditures in government ministries, departments, and local bodies on a cash/budgetary basis to ensure public accountability.
10.5 The Accounting Process / Accounting Cycle
The Accounting Cycle is the complete, recurring sequence of steps followed during each fiscal year (in Nepal, from Shrawan 1 to the end of Ashadh, roughly mid-July to mid-July) from the occurrence of a financial transaction to the preparation of Final Accounts:
| Stage | Accounting Cycle Step | Books / Statements Prepared | Core Purpose |
|---|---|---|---|
| Step 1 | Identification & Source Documents | Invoices, Cash Memos, Receipts, Pay-in-Slips, Debit/Credit Notes | Verifying that a monetary business transaction has occurred with authentic documentary proof |
| Step 2 | Recording (Journalizing) | Journal and Subsidiary Books (Purchase, Sales, Return Books, Cash Book) | Recording both Debit and Credit aspects chronologically in the Books of Original Entry |
| Step 3 | Classifying (Posting & Balancing) | Ledger (Principal Book of Accounts) | Grouping transactions of the same nature into dedicated individual accounts and finding closing balances (Balance c/d and Balance b/d) |
| Step 4 | Summarizing (Trial Balance) | Trial Balance | Listing all Debit and Credit ledger balances on a specific date to verify arithmetical accuracy |
| Step 5 | Preparing Final Accounts | Trading Account, Profit & Loss Account, and Balance Sheet | Ascertaining Gross Profit/Loss, Net Profit/Loss, and the true financial position (Assets, Liabilities, Capital) at year-end |
| Step 6 | Analysis, Interpretation & Communication | Financial Ratios, Audit Reports, AGM Presentations | Communicating financial insights to internal management and external stakeholders for decision-making |
Things to Remember (Unit 10 Summary)
- Fra Luca Pacioli published the first treatise on Double Entry Bookkeeping in 1494 A.D. in Venice, Italy.
- Bookkeeping covers recording (Journal) and classifying (Ledger), whereas Accounting covers summarizing (Trial Balance & Final Accounts), analyzing, interpreting, and communicating.
- The Accounting Cycle flows sequentially: Source Document → Journal → Ledger → Trial Balance → Final Accounts → Analysis and Communication.
Exercises (Unit 10)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Define bookkeeping in one sentence.
- Who is regarded as the Father of Modern Bookkeeping, and in which year was his book published?
- Define accounting according to the AICPA.
- Name the four major branches of accounting.
- List the sequential steps of the Accounting Cycle.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Explain any four objectives and four limitations of accounting.
- Differentiate between Bookkeeping and Accounting on any five bases.
- Briefly explain Financial Accounting, Cost Accounting, and Management Accounting.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- “Accounting begins where bookkeeping ends.” Justify this statement by explaining the scope, functions, and complete Accounting Process (Cycle) of a business organization.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 10 Solutions.
UNIT 11: BASIC ACCOUNTING CONCEPTS, SYSTEMS, AND TERMINOLOGIES
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Explain the two Systems of Bookkeeping: Single Entry System and Double Entry System, along with their features, advantages, disadvantages, and differences.
- Distinguish between the two Bases of Accounting: Cash Basis and Accrual Basis.
- Explain the core Accounting Concepts / Assumptions (GAAP): Business Entity, Money Measurement, Going Concern, Historical Cost, Dual Aspect (and the Accounting Equation), Accounting Period, Matching, and Realization Concepts.
- Define and apply 18 essential Basic Accounting Terminologies in the context of Nepal.
11.1 Accounting Systems: Single Entry vs. Double Entry System
There are two systems of recording financial transactions in the books of accounts:
1. Single Entry System
The Single Entry System is an incomplete, unscientific, and traditional method of bookkeeping in which the dual aspect of every transaction is ignored. Under this system, normally only Cash Book and Personal Accounts (of Debtors and Creditors) are maintained, while Real Accounts (other than cash) and Nominal Accounts (expenses and incomes) are not opened.
“Single entry system is not any particular system of bookkeeping, but rather the double entry system in an incomplete and disjointed form.” — J.R. Batliboi
- Merits: Simple to understand; economical (no need to hire a qualified accountant); requires fewer books; suitable for tiny roadside stalls or micro-retailers.
- Disadvantages: Incomplete and unscientific; Trial Balance cannot be prepared to check arithmetical accuracy; Trading and Profit & Loss Account cannot be prepared to find exact net profit; Balance Sheet cannot be prepared to show true financial position; high risk of undetected fraud; not accepted by tax authorities (IRD) or courts of law.
2. Double Entry System
The Double Entry System—propounded by Luca Pacioli in 1494 A.D.—is the modern, scientific, complete, and universally accepted system of bookkeeping which recognizes that every financial transaction has two equal and opposite aspects: a Receiving Aspect (Debit / Dr.) and a Giving Aspect (Credit / Cr.). Under this system, for every debit there must be a corresponding credit of an equal amount, and vice versa.
“Every business transaction has a two-fold effect and that affects two accounts in opposite directions, and if a complete record were to be made of each such transaction, it would be necessary to debit one account and credit another account. It is this recording of the two-fold effect of every transaction that has given rise to the term Double Entry System.” — J.R. Batliboi
Comparison Between Single Entry System and Double Entry System
| Basis of Comparison | Single Entry System | Double Entry System |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Dual Aspect Recording | Records only one aspect of a transaction (or omits both aspects for non-cash real/nominal items) | Records both aspects (Debit and Credit) of every financial transaction |
| 2. Accounts Maintained | Maintains only Personal Accounts (debtors/creditors) and Cash Book; ignores Real and Nominal accounts | Maintains all three classes of accounts: Personal, Real, and Nominal Accounts (or Assets, Liabilities, Equity, Revenue, Expenses) |
| 3. Arithmetical Accuracy (Trial Balance) | Trial Balance cannot be prepared; arithmetical accuracy of books cannot be verified | Trial Balance is prepared regularly to verify that Total Debits equal Total Credits |
| 4. Ascertainment of Profit or Loss | Only an estimated profit/loss can be guessed by comparing opening and closing capital | Exact Gross Profit/Loss and Net Profit/Loss are ascertained by preparing Trading and Profit & Loss Accounts |
| 5. True Financial Position (Balance Sheet) | A true Balance Sheet cannot be prepared in the absence of real asset accounts | A true Balance Sheet is prepared showing exact Assets, Liabilities, and Capital |
| 6. Legal & Tax Recognition | Not accepted by the Inland Revenue Department (tax office), banks, or courts of law | Universally accepted as authentic evidence by tax authorities, auditors, banks, and courts |
| 7. Suitability | Suitable only for very small petty traders with mostly cash dealings | Suitable for all small, medium, and large enterprises, companies, banks, and governments |
11.2 Bases of Accounting: Cash Basis vs. Accrual Basis
- Cash Basis of Accounting: Revenues are recorded only when actual cash is received, and expenses are recorded only when actual cash is paid, regardless of the accounting period to which they belong. Credit sales, credit purchases, outstanding expenses, and accrued incomes are ignored until cash changes hands. (Used in Nepal’s Government Accounting System and by some professional firms).
- Accrual / Mercantile Basis of Accounting: Revenues are recognized and recorded when they are earned (whether received in cash or sold on credit), and expenses are recorded when they are incurred (whether paid in cash or still outstanding/unpaid) during the accounting period to which they relate. (Mandatory for all commercial businesses and companies under NFRS/GAAP).
11.3 Basic Accounting Concepts / Assumptions
Accounting concepts are the fundamental assumptions and rules (Generally Accepted Accounting Principles — GAAP) upon which financial statements are prepared:
| Accounting Concept | Core Principle & Practical Application in Nepal |
|---|---|
| 1. Business Entity Concept | The business is treated as a separate and distinct unit from its owner(s). Therefore, when the proprietor invests Rs. 5,00,000 into the business, the business treats it as a liability (Capital) owed to the owner; if the owner withdraws Rs. 10,000 for domestic expenses, it is recorded separately as Drawings, not business expense. |
| 2. Money Measurement Concept | Only those transactions and events that can be expressed in monetary terms (e.g., Nepalese Rupees — Rs.) are recorded in the books of accounts. Non-monetary events (such as a quarrel between two managers or the high skill of a worker) are not recorded. |
| 3. Going Concern Concept | It is assumed that the business will continue to operate indefinitely in the foreseeable future and has no intention of closing down. Because of this assumption, fixed assets are recorded at historical cost and depreciated over their useful life rather than valued at immediate liquidation price. |
| 4. Cost (Historical Cost) Concept | An asset acquired by a business is recorded in the books of accounts at the actual price paid to acquire it (historical cost)—including transport and installation costs—rather than its fluctuating market price. For example, land bought 5 years ago for Rs. 20,00,000 is recorded at Rs. 20,00,000 even if its market value today is Rs. 45,00,000. |
| 5. Dual Aspect Concept & Accounting Equation | Every business transaction has two equal aspects (Debit and Credit), so the resources owned by a business (Assets) are always equal to the claims against those resources (Capital + Liabilities): Assets = Capital + Liabilities |
| 6. Accounting Period Concept | Although a business is a going concern with an indefinite life, its life is divided into uniform 12-month intervals called Accounting Periods (Fiscal Years) to measure profit/loss and financial position regularly. In Nepal, the official fiscal year runs for 12 continuous months from Shrawan 1 to the end of Ashadh (Fiscal Year). |
| 7. Matching Concept | To determine the true net profit or loss of an accounting period, the total revenues earned during that period must be matched against all expenses incurred (whether paid or outstanding) to earn that revenue. |
| 8. Realization (Revenue Recognition) Concept | Revenue is considered earned only when goods are actually transferred or services are rendered to the customer creating a legal right to receive payment—not merely when a customer places an order or pays an advance. |
Illustration of the Accounting Equation (Assets = Capital + Liabilities)
Let us verify how every transaction maintains the Accounting Equation:
- Ramesh started business with cash Rs. 2,00,000: Assets (Cash Rs. 2,00,000) = Capital (Rs. 2,00,000) + Liabilities (Rs. 0)
- Purchased furniture on credit from Koshi Furniture for Rs. 40,000: Assets (Cash 2,00,000 + Furniture 40,000 = Rs. 2,40,000) = Capital (Rs. 2,00,000) + Liabilities (Creditor Rs. 40,000)
- Sold goods costing Rs. 30,000 (purchased out of cash) for Rs. 38,000 in cash (Profit Rs. 8,000 adds to Capital): Assets (Cash 2,08,000 + Furniture 40,000 = Rs. 2,48,000) = Capital (Rs. 2,08,000) + Liabilities (Rs. 40,000)
11.4 Basic Accounting Terminologies
Mastery of the following 18 accounting terms is essential for every student:
- Capital: The total amount of cash, goods, or fixed assets invested by the proprietor or shareholders to start and run a business. It represents the owner’s claim on the business (
Capital = Assets - Liabilities). - Drawings: Any amount of cash or value of goods withdrawn by the proprietor from the business for personal, family, or domestic use (e.g., paying the owner’s house rent, life insurance premium, or children’s school fees from business cash). Drawings reduce Capital.
- Assets: All properties, economic resources, and receivables owned by a business that have monetary value and help generate future income:
- Fixed / Non-Current Assets: Acquired for long-term use (more than 1 year) and not for resale (e.g., Land & Building, Plant & Machinery, Furniture, Vehicles).
- Current / Floating Assets: Cash and assets expected to be converted into cash within one accounting year (e.g., Cash in hand, Cash at bank, Sundry Debtors, Bills Receivable, Closing Stock, Prepaid Expenses).
- Tangible Assets: Assets having physical existence that can be seen and touched (e.g., Building, Machinery, Cash, Stock).
- Intangible Assets: Assets lacking physical shape that cannot be touched but possess valuable legal/commercial rights (e.g., Goodwill, Patents, Trademarks, Copyrights, Software Licenses).
- Fictitious / Nominal Assets: Heavy deferred revenue expenditures or accumulated losses temporarily shown on the asset side of the Balance Sheet until written off against future profits, having zero resale value (e.g., Preliminary Expenses, Discount/Loss on Issue of Shares or Debentures).
- Liabilities: All financial debts and obligations payable by the business to outsiders:
- Long-Term / Fixed Liabilities: Payable after more than one year (e.g., Long-term Bank Loan, Debentures, Mortgage Loan).
- Current / Short-Term Liabilities: Payable within one year (e.g., Sundry Creditors, Bills Payable, Bank Overdraft, Outstanding Expenses, Advance/Unearned Income).
- Goods: Commodities or articles purchased or manufactured by a trader specifically for the purpose of resale at a profit. For a stationery dealer, books and pens are Goods (recorded under Purchases A/c and Sales A/c), whereas a table bought for office use is an Asset (recorded under Furniture A/c).
- Purchases and Purchase Return: Purchases refer to the buying of goods for resale (Cash Purchases + Credit Purchases). When defective or damaged goods are returned to the supplier, it is called Purchase Return or Return Outward.
- Sales and Sales Return: Sales refer to selling goods to customers for cash or on credit. When a customer returns goods back to the business, it is called Sales Return or Return Inward.
- Stock / Inventory: The value of unsold goods lying in the warehouse or shop at a particular date:
- Opening Stock: Unsold goods on hand at the beginning of the fiscal year (Shrawan 1).
- Closing Stock: Unsold goods remaining at the end of the fiscal year (end of Ashadh).
- Debtor / Accounts Receivable: A person or firm to whom the business has sold goods on credit and from whom money is receivable. Debtors are a Current Asset.
- Creditor / Accounts Payable: A person or supplier from whom the business has purchased goods on credit and to whom money is payable. Creditors are a Current Liability.
- Revenue / Income: The inflow of funds earned by selling goods or rendering services, plus secondary receipts such as commission received, rent received, interest received, and discount received.
- Expenses: The cost incurred in producing and selling goods and running the office (e.g., wages, salaries, rent, electricity, stationery, carriage, depreciation).
- Profit and Loss: Profit is the excess of total revenue over total expenses (
Revenue > Expenses), which increases Capital; Loss is the excess of total expenses over total revenue (Expenses > Revenue), which reduces Capital. - Discount: A rebate or deduction in price allowed by a seller to a buyer. It is of two distinct types:
| Basis of Comparison | Trade Discount | Cash Discount |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Meaning & Purpose | A deduction allowed by a manufacturer or wholesaler on the catalogue/list price to encourage bulk purchasing | A deduction allowed by a creditor to a debtor to encourage prompt or early payment of cash within a stipulated time |
| 2. When Allowed | Allowed at the time of purchasing or selling goods (both cash and credit) | Allowed only at the time of making or receiving cash/cheque payment |
| 3. Deduction in Invoice | Deducted directly on the face of the Invoice/Bill; entries are recorded at the net amount after deducting Trade Discount | Not deducted in the Invoice; calculated at the time of settlement |
| 4. Recording in Journal / Ledger | Never recorded separately in the Journal or Ledger accounts | Always recorded separately in the Journal and Cash Book as Discount Allowed A/c (Dr. — Expense) or Discount Received A/c (Cr. — Income) |
- Depreciation: The gradual and permanent decrease in the book value of a fixed tangible asset (except land) due to continuous use, wear and tear, passage of time, or technological obsolescence. It is a non-cash expense.
- Bad Debts and Bad Debts Recovered: When a debtor becomes insolvent or dishonest and fails to pay the amount due, the irrecoverable amount written off is a loss called Bad Debts. If a previously written-off bad debt is unexpectedly recovered in a later period, it is an income called Bad Debts Recovered.
- Solvent and Insolvent: A person or firm whose assets are equal to or greater than their liabilities (
Assets ≥ Liabilities) and who can pay all debts in full is Solvent; a person whose liabilities exceed their assets (Liabilities > Assets) and who cannot pay debts in full is Insolvent. - Fiscal / Financial Year: A continuous 12-month period adopted for closing accounts and preparing financial statements. In Nepal, it runs for 12 months from Shrawan 1 to the end of Ashadh (roughly mid-July to mid-July).
Things to Remember (Unit 11 Summary)
- The Accounting Equation states that Assets = Capital + Liabilities, derived from the Dual Aspect Concept.
- Trade Discount is deducted directly from the invoice price and is not shown in the Journal, whereas Cash Discount is allowed for prompt payment and must be recorded in the Journal/Cash Book.
- Debtors (credit customers) are Current Assets; Creditors (credit suppliers) are Current Liabilities.
Exercises (Unit 11)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- State the Accounting Equation.
- Under which accounting concept is the proprietor treated as a creditor of the business for their capital?
- What is meant by a Fiscal Year?
- Define Fictitious Assets with two examples.
- What is Bad Debt?
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Differentiate between Single Entry System and Double Entry System on any four bases.
- Explain the Business Entity Concept, Money Measurement Concept, Going Concern Concept, and Matching Concept.
- Differentiate between Trade Discount and Cash Discount.
- Distinguish between: (a) Fixed Assets and Current Assets, and (b) Debtors and Creditors.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- What is the Double Entry System of bookkeeping? Explain its features, objectives, and advantages in detail.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 11 Solutions.
UNIT 12: JOURNAL ENTRIES
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define a Journal as the book of original/prime entry and explain its objectives and importance.
- Draw the standard 5-column Specimen of a Journal and explain the purpose of each column.
- Master both approaches to the Rules of Debit and Credit:
- Traditional / Golden Rules of Accounting (Personal, Real, and Nominal Accounts)
- Modern / Accounting Equation Rules of Accounting (Assets, Expenses/Losses, Liabilities, Capital, and Revenues/Gains)
- Prepare accurate Simple and Compound Journal Entries across all Grade 9 business transactions: capital commencement, cash/credit purchases and sales, purchase/sales returns, banking transactions, trade and cash discounts, drawings, expenses (paid, outstanding, prepaid), depreciation, and bad debts/bad debts recovered.
12.1 Meaning, Objectives, and Format of a Journal
The word Journal is derived from the French word Jour, meaning “a day.” Therefore, a Journal is a daily record book (Book of Original Entry or Book of Prime Entry) in which financial transactions are first recorded in strict chronological (date-wise) order from source vouchers, showing which account is Debited (Dr.) and which account is Credited (Cr.), along with a brief explanation called Narration.
- Journalizing: The process of analyzing a transaction and recording it in the Journal.
- Narration: A short, clear explanation written in brackets
(Being ...)immediately below each journal entry summarizing the transaction. - Simple vs. Compound Journal Entry: A journal entry involving only one Debit account and one Credit account is a Simple Journal Entry; an entry involving two or more Debit accounts and/or two or more Credit accounts on the same date is a Compound (Combined) Journal Entry.
Specimen Format of a Journal (5 Columns)
Journal Entries in the Books of [Name of Business / Proprietor]
| Date (1) | Particulars (2) | L.F. (3) | Debit Amount (Rs.) (4) | Credit Amount (Rs.) (5) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-01-01 | [Name of Account to be Debited] A/c …………………… Dr.To [Name of Account to be Credited] A/c(Being [brief narration explaining the transaction]) | XXX,XXX | XXX,XXX |
- Date: Records the year, month, and day of the transaction (e.g.,
2082-04-01). - Particulars: Records the name of the account debited on the first line with
Dr.at the right end, the name of the account credited on the next line prefixed withTo, and the Narration in parentheses on the third line. - L.F. (Ledger Folio): Records the page number of the Ledger where the entry is subsequently posted, acting as a cross-reference index. (In classroom exercises, this column remains blank).
- Debit Amount (Rs.): Records the monetary amount debited.
- Credit Amount (Rs.): Records the monetary amount credited.
12.2 Rules of Debit and Credit
There are two complementary methods for determining which account to Debit and which account to Credit. Both methods always yield the exact same journal entry!
Method A: Traditional Classification of Accounts (The Three Golden Rules)
Under the traditional British approach, all accounts are classified into Personal Accounts, Real Accounts, and Nominal Accounts:
| Type of Account | Meaning & Sub-Types | Examples of Accounts | Golden Rule of Debit and Credit |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Personal Account | Accounts of Natural Persons (individuals), Artificial/Legal Persons (companies, banks, schools, clubs, government offices), and Representative Personal Accounts (representing a person/group) | Ram’s A/c, Sita’s A/c, Nepal Bank Ltd. A/c, Pashupati Traders A/c, Capital A/c, Drawing A/c, Outstanding Salary A/c, Prepaid Rent A/c | Debit the Receiver Credit the Giver |
| 2. Real Account | Accounts of all tangible and intangible properties, goods, and assets of the business (except personal debtors/bank) | Cash A/c, Purchases/Goods A/c, Sales A/c, Furniture A/c, Machinery A/c, Land & Building A/c, Computer A/c, Goodwill A/c, Patent A/c | Debit What Comes In Credit What Goes Out |
| 3. Nominal Account | Temporary accounts of all expenses, losses, incomes, and gains that exist in name only and close into the Trading/P&L Account at year-end | Salary A/c, Rent A/c, Wages A/c, Interest Paid/Received A/c, Commission A/c, Discount Allowed/Received A/c, Depreciation A/c, Bad Debts A/c | Debit All Expenses and Losses Credit All Incomes and Gains |
Method B: Modern / Accounting Equation Approach (5 Categories of Accounts)
Under the modern American approach based on the Accounting Equation (Assets + Expenses = Liabilities + Capital + Revenue), accounts are divided into five categories:
| Category of Account | Normal Balance | When It Increases (↑) | When It Decreases (↓) | Examples |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Assets | Debit (Dr.) | DEBIT (Dr.) | CREDIT (Cr.) | Cash, Bank, Furniture, Machinery, Building, Stock/Goods, Debtors |
| 2. Expenses & Losses | Debit (Dr.) | DEBIT (Dr.) | CREDIT (Cr.) | Purchases, Salary, Wages, Rent, Stationery, Discount Allowed, Depreciation, Bad Debts |
| 3. Liabilities | Credit (Cr.) | CREDIT (Cr.) | DEBIT (Dr.) | Creditors, Bank Loan, Bills Payable, Outstanding Expenses |
| 4. Capital / Owner’s Equity | Credit (Cr.) | CREDIT (Cr.) | DEBIT (Dr.) (Drawings) | Capital A/c (Drawings reduces Capital, so Drawings is Debited) |
| 5. Revenues / Incomes & Gains | Credit (Cr.) | CREDIT (Cr.) | DEBIT (Dr.) | Sales, Interest Received, Commission Received, Discount Received, Bad Debts Recovered |
Memory Shortcut (DEALER Rule):
- D-E-A (Drawings, Expenses, Assets) → Increase is Debit (Dr.), Decrease is Credit (Cr.).
- L-E-R (Liabilities, Owner’s Equity/Capital, Revenue) → Increase is Credit (Cr.), Decrease is Debit (Dr.).
12.3 Master Guide to Standard Journal Entries (All Syllabus Scenarios)
| S.N. | Nature of Transaction | Journal Entry (Particulars) | Rule / Logic Applied |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Commenced business with Cash, Bank Balance, Goods (Stock), and Furniture | Cash A/c ........................ Dr.Bank A/c ........................ Dr.Purchase / Stock of Goods A/c ... Dr.Furniture A/c ................... Dr. To Capital A/c(Being business started with cash, bank, goods, and furniture) | Assets come in (Dr.); Proprietor is the giver / Capital increases (Cr.) |
| 2. | Cash deposited into the Bank (or opened a Bank Account) | Bank A/c ........................ Dr. To Cash A/c(Being cash deposited into the bank) | Bank is the receiver / Bank asset increases (Dr.); Cash goes out (Cr.) |
| 3. | Goods purchased for Cash | Purchase A/c .................... Dr. To Cash A/c(Being goods purchased for cash) | Goods come in / Expense increases (Dr.); Cash goes out (Cr.) |
| 4. | Goods purchased on Credit from a supplier (e.g., Sita Traders) (Note: Whenever a person/firm’s name is given without the word “for cash”, it is a Credit transaction) | Purchase A/c .................... Dr. To Sita Traders A/c(Being goods purchased on credit from Sita Traders) | Goods come in (Dr.); Sita Traders is the giver / Creditor increases (Cr.) |
| 5. | Goods purchased partly for cash and partly on credit (e.g., Bought goods from Hari for Rs. 20,000 and paid Rs. 8,000 in cash) | Purchase A/c .................... Dr. 20,000 To Cash A/c ......................... 8,000 To Hari's A/c ....................... 12,000(Being goods purchased from Hari with partial cash payment) | Total goods come in Rs. 20,000 (Dr.); Cash goes out Rs. 8,000 (Cr.) and Creditor Hari is giver for balance Rs. 12,000 (Cr.) |
| 6. | Purchase of a Fixed Asset (e.g., Machinery, Computer, or Furniture) for office use (Never debit Purchase A/c for fixed assets!) | Machinery / Furniture A/c ....... Dr. To Cash / Bank / Supplier A/c(Being machinery/furniture purchased) | Specific Fixed Asset comes in (Dr.); Cash/Bank/Supplier goes out (Cr.) |
| 7. | Goods returned to a Credit Supplier (Purchase Return / Return Outward) | Supplier (Creditor) A/c ......... Dr. To Purchase Return A/c(Being defective goods returned to supplier) | Supplier is the receiver (Dr.); Goods go out (Cr.) |
| 8. | Goods sold for Cash | Cash A/c ........................ Dr. To Sales A/c(Being goods sold for cash) | Cash comes in (Dr.); Goods go out / Revenue increases (Cr.) |
| 9. | Goods sold on Credit to a customer (e.g., Kiran) | Kiran's A/c ..................... Dr. To Sales A/c(Being goods sold on credit to Kiran) | Kiran is the receiver / Debtor increases (Dr.); Sales revenue increases (Cr.) |
| 10. | Goods returned by a Credit Customer (Sales Return / Return Inward) | Sales Return A/c ................ Dr. To Customer (Debtor) A/c(Being goods returned by customer) | Goods come back in / Revenue reduces (Dr.); Customer is the giver (Cr.) |
| 11. | Cash or Cheque withdrawn from Bank for Office Use | Cash A/c ........................ Dr. To Bank A/c(Being cash withdrawn from bank for office use) | Cash comes into office (Dr.); Bank is the giver (Cr.) |
| 12. | Cash, Cheque, or Goods withdrawn by Proprietor for Personal / Domestic Use (or paying owner’s personal bills) | Drawing A/c ..................... Dr. To Cash / Bank / Purchase A/c(Being cash/goods withdrawn by owner for personal use) | Owner is receiver (Drawing A/c Dr.); Cash, Bank, or Goods at cost (Purchase A/c Cr.) goes out |
| 13. | Cash paid to a Creditor in “Full Settlement” receiving Cash Discount (e.g., Paid Rs. 9,500 to Sita in full settlement of her account of Rs. 10,000) | Sita's A/c ...................... Dr. 10,000 To Cash A/c ......................... 9,500 To Discount Received A/c ............ 500(Being cash paid to Sita in full settlement and discount received) | Creditor Sita is settled in full Rs. 10,000 (Dr.); Cash goes out Rs. 9,500 (Cr.); Discount Received Rs. 500 is an income (Cr.) |
| 14. | Cash received from a Debtor in “Full Settlement” allowing Cash Discount (e.g., Received Rs. 4,800 from Kiran in full settlement of Rs. 5,000) | Cash A/c ........................ Dr. 4,800Discount Allowed A/c ............ Dr. 200 To Kiran's A/c ...................... 5,000(Being cash received from Kiran in full settlement and discount allowed) | Cash comes in Rs. 4,800 (Dr.); Discount Allowed Rs. 200 is an expense (Dr.); Debtor Kiran gives/settles Rs. 5,000 (Cr.) |
| 15. | Payment of Operating Expenses (Salary, Rent, Wages, Stationery, Telephone, Electricity) in Cash or by Cheque (Note: Even if the landlord or employee’s name is mentioned—e.g., “Paid salary to Ram”—never debit Ram’s A/c; always debit the Expense A/c!) | Salary / Rent / Wages A/c ....... Dr. To Cash / Bank A/c(Being salary/rent paid) | Nominal Account: Expense is debited (Dr.); Cash or Bank goes out (Cr.) |
| 16. | Receipt of Incomes (Commission, Interest, Rent, Dividend) in Cash or by Cheque | Cash / Bank A/c ................. Dr. To Commission / Interest A/c(Being commission/interest received) | Cash/Bank comes in (Dr.); Nominal Account: Income is credited (Cr.) |
| 17. | Depreciation charged on Fixed Assets (e.g., 10% Depreciation on Furniture costing Rs. 50,000) | Depreciation A/c ................ Dr. 5,000 To Furniture A/c .................... 5,000(Being depreciation charged on furniture) | Depreciation is a non-cash expense (Dr.); Value of Furniture asset decreases (Cr.) |
| 18. | Debtor becomes insolvent and amount is irrecoverable (Bad Debts written off) | Bad Debts A/c ................... Dr. To Debtor's A/c(Being amount due from debtor written off as bad debt) | Bad Debts is a loss (Dr.); Debtor asset decreases (Cr.) |
| 19. | Recovery of Bad Debts previously written off (Never credit the old Debtor’s name; credit Bad Debts Recovered A/c!) | Cash A/c ........................ Dr. To Bad Debts Recovered A/c(Being bad debts previously written off now recovered) | Cash comes in (Dr.); Bad Debts Recovered is a gain (Cr.) |
| 20. | Goods distributed as Free Samples (Advertisement), lost by fire/theft, or given as Charity | Advertisement / Loss by Fire / Charity A/c ... Dr. To Purchase A/c(Being goods distributed as free samples / lost by fire) | Expense or Loss is debited (Dr.); Goods go out at cost price (To Purchase A/c Cr.) |
12.4 Comprehensive Worked Numerical Illustrations
Illustration 1: Complete Monthly Transactions of a Trading Concern
Question: Journalize the following transactions in the books of Gokarna Enterprises, Kathmandu for the month of Baisakh 2082:
- Baisakh 1: Commenced business with cash Rs. 2,50,000, bank balance Rs. 1,50,000, and furniture Rs. 50,000.
- Baisakh 3: Purchased goods for Rs. 60,000 at a 10% trade discount from Bagmati Suppliers.
- Baisakh 6: Sold goods costing Rs. 20,000 to Anish for Rs. 25,000 on credit.
- Baisakh 9: Returned defective goods worth Rs. 4,000 (net) to Bagmati Suppliers.
- Baisakh 12: Paid Rs. 48,500 by cheque to Bagmati Suppliers in full settlement of their account.
- Baisakh 15: Received Rs. 24,200 in cash from Anish in full settlement of his account.
- Baisakh 18: Withdrew cash Rs. 6,000 from bank for office use and Rs. 4,000 for the proprietor’s personal use.
- Baisakh 22: Goods costing Rs. 3,000 were distributed as free samples for sales promotion.
- Baisakh 26: Arun, a debtor who owed Rs. 5,000, was declared insolvent and only 60% of the amount due was recovered in cash from his estate.
- Baisakh 30: Paid staff salary Rs. 18,000 by cheque and office rent Rs. 10,000 in cash.
Solution:
Journal Entries in the Books of Gokarna Enterprises, Kathmandu
| Date | Particulars | L.F. | Debit (Rs.) | Credit (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-01-01 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. Bank A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. Furniture A/c …………………………………………… Dr. To Capital A/c (Being business commenced with cash, bank balance, and furniture) | 2,50,000 1,50,000 50,000 | 4,50,000 | |
| 2082-01-03 | Purchase A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Bagmati Suppliers A/c (Being goods of Rs. 60,000 purchased on credit at 10% trade discount: 60,000 - 6,000 = 54,000) | 54,000 | 54,000 | |
| 2082-01-06 | Anish’s A/c …………………………………………….. Dr. To Sales A/c (Being goods sold on credit to Anish at selling price Rs. 25,000) | 25,000 | 25,000 | |
| 2082-01-09 | Bagmati Suppliers A/c ……………………………………. Dr. To Purchase Return A/c (Being defective goods returned to Bagmati Suppliers) | 4,000 | 4,000 | |
| 2082-01-12 | Bagmati Suppliers A/c ……………………………………. Dr. To Bank A/c To Discount Received A/c (Being cheque paid to Bagmati Suppliers in full settlement of net balance Rs. 50,000 [ 54,000 - 4,000]) | 50,000 | 48,500 1,500 | |
| 2082-01-15 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. Discount Allowed A/c …………………………………….. Dr. To Anish’s A/c (Being cash received from Anish in full settlement and discount allowed) | 24,200 800 | 25,000 | |
| 2082-01-18 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. Drawing A/c …………………………………………….. Dr. To Bank A/c (Being cash withdrawn from bank for office use and personal use) | 6,000 4,000 | 10,000 | |
| 2082-01-22 | Advertisement (Free Sample) A/c …………………………… Dr. To Purchase A/c (Being goods distributed as free samples) | 3,000 | 3,000 | |
| 2082-01-26 | Cash A/c (60% of 5,000) ……………………… Dr.Bad Debts A/c ( 40% of 5,000) …………………. Dr.To Arun’s A/c (Being 60% recovered from insolvent debtor Arun and 40% written off as bad debt) | 3,000 2,000 | 5,000 | |
| 2082-01-30 | Salary A/c ……………………………………………… Dr. Rent A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. To Bank A/c To Cash A/c (Being salary paid by cheque and office rent paid in cash) | 18,000 10,000 | 18,000 10,000 | |
| Grand Total | 6,21,000 | 6,21,000 |
Things to Remember (Unit 12 Summary)
- A Journal is the Book of Original Entry recording transactions chronologically with 5 columns: Date, Particulars, L.F., Debit (Rs.), and Credit (Rs.).
- Golden Rules: Personal: Dr. the Receiver, Cr. the Giver; Real: Dr. What comes in, Cr. What goes out; Nominal: Dr. All expenses & losses, Cr. All incomes & gains.
- When goods are sold for Rs. 25,000 (costing Rs. 20,000), the journal entry in periodic inventory accounting records the selling price (Rs. 25,000) in
Sales A/c.
Exercises (Unit 12)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Why is the Journal called the Book of Original Entry?
- What is meant by Journalizing and Narration?
- State the Golden Rules of Debit and Credit for Personal, Real, and Nominal accounts.
- Why is
Purchase A/ccredited when the proprietor withdraws goods for personal use?
B. Numerical Problems for Practice (6 to 8 Marks Each)
Problem 12.1: Journalize the following transactions in the books of Siddhartha Traders, Butwal for Jestha 2082:
- Jestha 1: Started business with cash Rs. 3,00,000 and goods worth Rs. 80,000.
- Jestha 4: Deposited cash into Everest Bank Ltd. Rs. 1,80,000.
- Jestha 8: Purchased goods from Nima for Rs. 40,000 and paid Rs. 15,000 immediately by cheque.
- Jestha 12: Purchased a computer for office use for Rs. 45,000 and paid by cheque.
- Jestha 16: Sold goods to Bhuwan for Rs. 30,000 at a 10% trade discount.
- Jestha 20: Settled Nima’s account by paying cash Rs. 24,000 in full settlement.
- Jestha 25: Received Rs. 26,000 from Bhuwan in full settlement of his account.
- Jestha 28: Charged 10% depreciation on the computer costing Rs. 45,000.
- Jestha 30: Received Rs. 2,500 cash from Ram, whose debt had been written off as a bad debt last year. (Check Answer: Grand Total of Journal = Rs. 7,31,000)
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 12 Solutions.
UNIT 13: LEDGER
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define a Ledger as the Principal Book of Accounts (King of Books) and explain its objectives and utility.
- Differentiate clearly between a Journal and a Ledger.
- Draw the standard 8-column ‘T’ Specimen of a Ledger Account and explain each column.
- Apply the step-by-step rules of Posting from Journal entries to respective Ledger accounts.
- Balance and close Personal, Real, and Nominal Ledger accounts using
To/By Balance c/dandTo/By Balance b/d, and interpret what Debit and Credit balances signify.
13.1 Meaning, Definition, and Objectives of a Ledger
In a Journal, all kinds of transactions are recorded chronologically in one place. If a trader wants to know at a glance “How much total cash do I have today?” or “How much does debtor Anish owe me right now?”, searching through hundreds of pages of a Journal is slow and impractical.
To answer such questions instantly, transactions of the same nature or head recorded in the Journal are grouped and transferred into separate individual accounts in a second book called the Ledger. Because it is the second stage of recording, the Ledger is called the Book of Secondary Entry or the Principal Book of Accounts.
“The book which contains a classified and permanent record of all the transactions of a business is called the Ledger.” — J.R. Batliboi
“A ledger account may be defined as a summary statement of all the transactions relating to a person, asset, expense, or income which have taken place during a given period of time and shows their net effect.” — S.P. Jain & K.L. Narang
Objectives and Importance of a Ledger
- Classified Summary at a Glance: Collects all transactions relating to a particular person, asset, liability, expense, or income under one dedicated account head.
- Instant Knowledge of Debtors and Creditors: Shows immediately how much money is receivable from each customer (Debtor) and how much is payable to each supplier (Creditor).
- Ascertaining Exact Balances of Assets and Cash: Reveals the closing balance of Cash, Bank, Furniture, Machinery, and other assets on any date.
- Foundation for Preparing the Trial Balance: Ledger account balances (
Balance b/d) are the direct inputs used to prepare the Trial Balance and test arithmetical accuracy. - Helps Prepare Final Accounts: Summarized ledger balances of Purchases, Sales, Expenses, Incomes, Assets, and Liabilities enable the preparation of the Trading Account, Profit & Loss Account, and Balance Sheet.
13.2 Differences Between Journal and Ledger
| Basis of Comparison | Journal | Ledger |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Nature & Stage of Book | Book of Original (Primary) Entry; first book in which transactions are recorded from source vouchers | Book of Secondary (Principal) Entry; prepared from the Journal and Subsidiary Books |
| 2. Order of Recording | Chronological (Date-wise) order as transactions occur day by day | Analytical (Account-wise / Head-wise) classification grouping similar transactions together |
| 3. Name of Process | The process of recording in the Journal is called Journalizing | The process of transferring entries into the Ledger is called Posting |
| 4. Format & Columns | Has 5 columns (Date, Particulars, L.F., Debit Rs., Credit Rs.) | Has 8 columns divided into two equal sides (Debit side — 4 columns and Credit side — 4 columns in ‘T’ shape) |
| 5. Narration | Every journal entry must be supported by a Narration in brackets | No narration is required while posting in a Ledger account |
| 6. Folio Reference | Contains the L.F. (Ledger Folio) column showing the page number of the Ledger | Contains the J.F. (Journal Folio) column showing the page number of the Journal |
| 7. Balancing | A Journal is only totalled at the end of each page/month; it is not balanced | Every Ledger account is balanced at the end of the period (Balance c/d and Balance b/d) |
| 8. Link to Trial Balance | A Trial Balance cannot be prepared directly from the Journal | A Trial Balance is prepared directly from the closing balances of Ledger accounts |
13.3 Specimen of a Ledger Account (8 Columns in ‘T’ Form)
Every Ledger account is divided into two equal halves taking the shape of the English capital letter ‘T’: the left-hand side is the Debit (Dr.) side and the right-hand side is the Credit (Cr.) side.
Dr. …………………………………….. [Name of the Account] A/c …………………………………….. Cr.
| Date (1) | Particulars (2) | J.F. (3) | Amount (Rs.) (4) | Date (5) | Particulars (6) | J.F. (7) | Amount (Rs.) (8) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-01-01 | To [Name of Credit A/c in Journal] | XX,XXX | 2082-01-05 | By [Name of Debit A/c in Journal] | XX,XXX |
13.4 Step-by-Step Rules for Posting from Journal to Ledger
- Open Separate Accounts: Open a separate Ledger account for each distinct account head that appears in the Journal entries (never open two accounts with the same name).
- Posting to the Debit Side (
To ...): If an account is Debited in a Journal entry, post the entry on the Debit (left) side of that account by writing the date,To [Name of the Credited Account in that Journal entry]in the Particulars column, and that account’s own debit amount in the Amount column. - Posting to the Credit Side (
By ...): If an account is Credited in a Journal entry, post the entry on the Credit (right) side of that account by writing the date,By [Name of the Debited Account in that Journal entry]in the Particulars column, and that account’s own credit amount in the Amount column. - Never Write an Account’s Own Name Inside Its Own Particulars Column: Inside
Cash A/c, the wordTo Cash A/corBy Cash A/ccan never appear!
13.5 Balancing and Closing of Ledger Accounts
At the end of a month or fiscal year, we find the net position of each Ledger account through Balancing:
- Total both the Debit side and Credit side roughly on a scratchpad and find which side is heavier (larger).
- Write the larger total in the total box at the bottom of both sides on the same horizontal line, double-underlining the total.
- On the shorter (lighter) side, insert the difference on the last date of the month/year:
- If the Debit side is larger than the Credit side (
Dr. > Cr.), writeBy Balance c/d(carried down) on the Credit side to equalize the totals, and bring it down on the first day of the next month on the Debit side asTo Balance b/d(brought down). Such an account is said to have a Debit Balance. - If the Credit side is larger than the Debit side (
Cr. > Dr.), writeTo Balance c/don the Debit side to equalize the totals, and bring it down on the first day of the next month on the Credit side asBy Balance b/d. Such an account has a Credit Balance. - If both sides are already equal (
Dr. = Cr.), the account is Closed / Settled with zero balance.
- If the Debit side is larger than the Credit side (
What Do Ledger Balances Signify?
| Nature of Account | Normal Closing Balance (Balance b/d) | Meaning of the Balance |
|---|---|---|
| Asset Accounts (Cash, Furniture, Machinery) | Debit Balance | Value of the asset currently held by the business |
| Personal Account of a Customer | Debit Balance | The person is a Debtor (amount receivable by the business) |
| Personal Account of a Supplier | Credit Balance | The person is a Creditor (amount payable by the business) |
| Capital Account | Credit Balance | Owner’s net equity/investment in the business |
| Expense & Loss Accounts | Debit Balance | Total expense/loss incurred during the period (transferred to Trading/P&L A/c) |
| Revenue & Gain Accounts | Credit Balance | Total income/revenue earned during the period (transferred to Trading/P&L A/c) |
13.6 Complete Worked Numerical Illustration (Journal to Ledger & Balancing)
Question: Journalize the following transactions of Himalayan Hardware, Pokhara for Shrawan 2082 and prepare Cash Account, Purchase Account, Suresh’s Account, and Sales Account:
- Shrawan 1: Started business with cash Rs. 2,00,000.
- Shrawan 5: Purchased goods from Suresh on credit for Rs. 50,000.
- Shrawan 10: Purchased goods for cash Rs. 20,000.
- Shrawan 15: Sold goods for cash Rs. 45,000.
- Shrawan 20: Paid cash Rs. 48,500 to Suresh in full settlement of his account.
- Shrawan 28: Paid office rent Rs. 12,000 in cash.
Solution — Step 1: Journal Entries
| Date | Particulars | L.F. | Debit (Rs.) | Credit (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-04-01 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. To Capital A/c (Being business started with cash) | 2,00,000 | 2,00,000 | |
| 2082-04-05 | Purchase A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Suresh’s A/c (Being goods purchased on credit from Suresh) | 50,000 | 50,000 | |
| 2082-04-10 | Purchase A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Cash A/c (Being goods purchased for cash) | 20,000 | 20,000 | |
| 2082-04-15 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. To Sales A/c (Being goods sold for cash) | 45,000 | 45,000 | |
| 2082-04-20 | Suresh’s A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Cash A/c To Discount Received A/c (Being cash paid to Suresh in full settlement and discount received) | 50,000 | 48,500 1,500 | |
| 2082-04-28 | Rent A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. To Cash A/c (Being office rent paid in cash) | 12,000 | 12,000 |
Solution — Step 2: Ledger Accounts
1. Dr. ……………………………………………… Cash Account ……………………………………………… Cr.
| Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-04-01 | To Capital A/c | 2,00,000 | 2082-04-10 | By Purchase A/c | 20,000 | ||
| 2082-04-15 | To Sales A/c | 45,000 | 2082-04-20 | By Suresh’s A/c | 48,500 | ||
| 2082-04-28 | By Rent A/c | 12,000 | |||||
| 2082-04-32 | By Balance c/d | 1,64,500 | |||||
| Total | 2,45,000 | Total | 2,45,000 | ||||
| 2082-05-01 | To Balance b/d | 1,64,500 |
2. Dr. ……………………………………………. Purchase Account ……………………………………………. Cr.
| Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-04-05 | To Suresh’s A/c | 50,000 | 2082-04-32 | By Balance c/d | 70,000 | ||
| 2082-04-10 | To Cash A/c | 20,000 | |||||
| Total | 70,000 | Total | 70,000 | ||||
| 2082-05-01 | To Balance b/d | 70,000 |
3. Dr. …………………………………………….. Suresh’s Account …………………………………………….. Cr.
| Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-04-20 | To Cash A/c | 48,500 | 2082-04-05 | By Purchase A/c | 50,000 | ||
| 2082-04-20 | To Discount Received A/c | 1,500 | |||||
| Total | 50,000 | Total | 50,000 |
(Note: Suresh’s Account has equal Debit and Credit totals of Rs. 50,000, so his account is completely settled with zero closing balance.)
4. Dr. ……………………………………………… Sales Account ……………………………………………… Cr.
| Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-04-32 | To Balance c/d | 45,000 | 2082-04-15 | By Cash A/c | 45,000 | ||
| Total | 45,000 | Total | 45,000 | ||||
| 2082-05-01 | By Balance b/d | 45,000 |
Things to Remember (Unit 13 Summary)
- The Ledger is the Principal Book of Accounts containing 8 columns (Date, Particulars, J.F., Amount on both Dr. and Cr. sides).
- While posting a compound entry (such as
Suresh's A/c Dr. 50,000 To Cash A/c 48,500 To Discount Received A/c 1,500), insideCash A/con the Credit side we writeBy Suresh's A/c, but the amount entered in Cash A/c is strictly Cash’s own amount (Rs. 48,500), not Rs. 50,000! - If
Debit Total > Credit Total, the account has a Debit Balance (By Balance c/don Cr. side →To Balance b/don Dr. side).
Exercises (Unit 13)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Why is the Ledger called the Principal Book of Accounts?
- Define Posting and Balancing of a Ledger Account.
- What do
c/dandb/dstand for in ledger balancing? - What does a Debit balance in a Personal Account signify? What does a Credit balance signify?
B. Numerical Problems for Practice (8 Marks Each)
Problem 13.1: From the following transactions of Lumbini Store, prepare Furniture Account and Pradhan’s Account and balance them:
- Opening balance of Furniture on Chaitra 1: Rs. 90,000.
- Chaitra 5: Purchased furniture on credit from Pradhan for Rs. 25,000.
- Chaitra 12: Purchased additional furniture for cash Rs. 15,000.
- Chaitra 18: Returned damaged furniture worth Rs. 3,000 to Pradhan.
- Chaitra 22: Sold old furniture costing Rs. 10,000 for cash Rs. 10,000.
- Chaitra 26: Paid cash Rs. 21,000 to Pradhan in full settlement of his account.
- Chaitra 30: Provided depreciation on furniture Rs. 7,000. (Check Answers: Closing Debit Balance of Furniture A/c = Rs. 1,10,000; Pradhan’s A/c is fully settled at Rs. 25,000 with Rs. 1,000 Discount Received).
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 13 Solutions.
UNIT 14: SUBSIDIARY BOOKS AND CASH BOOK
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Explain why large businesses subdivide the Journal into specialized Subsidiary Books (Special Journals) and state their advantages.
- Identify the golden rules for what is included and excluded in Subsidiary Books.
- Prepare the four merchandise Subsidiary Books with net Trade Discount calculations:
- Purchase Book
- Purchase Return Book / Return Outward Book
- Sales Book
- Sales Return Book / Return Inward Book
- Explain why the Cash Book is both a Book of Original Entry and a Ledger Account, and prepare:
- Simple (Single Column) Cash Book
- Double Column Cash Book (Cash & Discount, Bank & Discount, and Cash & Bank Columns with Contra Entries ‘C’)
- Triple Column Cash Book (Cash, Bank, and Discount Columns)
- Understand the basic concept of a Petty Cash Book.
14.1 Meaning, Need, and Types of Subsidiary Books
In a medium or large business where hundreds of credit purchases, credit sales, and cash receipts/payments occur daily, recording every single transaction in one single Journal becomes bulky, slow, and impossible for multiple clerks to work on simultaneously. To overcome this limitation, the Journal is subdivided into specialized books called Subsidiary Books, Special Journals, or Day Books.
“Subsidiary books of accounts are also called books of original entry because all the transactions are recorded originally or in the first instance in these subsidiary books.” — A.N. Agarwala
Summary of the Major Subsidiary Books
| Name of Subsidiary Book | Transactions Recorded Exclusively in This Book | Source Document Used |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Purchase Book (Purchase Journal) | Only Credit Purchases of Merchandise Goods (meant for resale) | Inward Invoice / Purchase Bill received from supplier |
| 2. Sales Book (Sales Journal) | Only Credit Sales of Merchandise Goods to customers | Outward Invoice / Sales Bill issued to customer |
| 3. Purchase Return Book (Return Outward Book) | Return of goods previously purchased on credit back to the supplier | Debit Note issued to supplier |
| 4. Sales Return Book (Return Inward Book) | Return of goods previously sold on credit by customers back to the business | Credit Note issued to customer |
| 5. Cash Book | All Cash and Bank Receipts and Payments (including cash purchases, cash sales, and cash/bank settlement of assets/expenses) | Cash Receipts, Payment Vouchers, Cheque Counterfoils |
| 6. Bills Receivable & Bills Payable Books | Bills of exchange drawn on debtors or accepted in favor of creditors | Bills of Exchange / Promissory Notes |
| 7. Journal Proper (General Journal) | Residual transactions that do not fit into any of the above special books (e.g., credit purchase/sale of fixed assets, depreciation, bad debts, opening/closing/rectification entries) | Journal Vouchers |
CRITICAL GOLDEN RULE FOR PURCHASE BOOK & SALES BOOK (EXAM TRAP!):
When preparing a Purchase Book or Sales Book, you must STRICTLY IGNORE AND EXCLUDE two types of transactions:
- Cash Transactions: Any purchase or sale made for cash or by cheque is NOT recorded in the Purchase Book or Sales Book (it goes to the Cash Book).
- Asset Transactions: Any purchase or sale of Fixed Assets (such as furniture, machinery, computers, or office equipment—unless the business itself is a furniture/computer dealership!) is NOT recorded in the Purchase Book or Sales Book (credit asset purchases go to Journal Proper).
Always write a clear Note at the bottom of your solution explaining why those transactions were excluded!
14.2 Merchandise Subsidiary Books: Formats and Worked Illustrations
1. Purchase Book & Purchase Return Book
- Purchase Book Columns:
Date|Particulars (Name of Supplier & Item Details)|Invoice No.|L.F.|Details (Rs.)|Total Amount (Rs.) - Purchase Return Book Columns:
Date|Particulars (Name of Supplier & Returned Items)|Debit Note No.|L.F.|Details (Rs.)|Total Amount (Rs.)
Worked Illustration 14.1: Purchase Book
Question: Prepare a Purchase Book of Kathmandu Electronics from the following transactions for Mangsir 2082:
- Mangsir 2: Purchased from Pashupati Electric Suppliers, New Road (Invoice No. 114):
- 20 Electric Heaters @ Rs. 1,500 each
- 15 Rice Cookers @ Rs. 2,000 each
- Less: Trade Discount @ 10%
- Mangsir 8: Purchased from Surya Furniture on credit: 2 office tables @ Rs. 8,000 each for office use.
- Mangsir 14: Purchased from Everest Appliances, Birgunj (Invoice No. 209):
- 10 Refrigerators @ Rs. 25,000 each
- 20 Table Fans @ Rs. 2,500 each
- (Add: Packing and delivery charges Rs. 2,000)
- Mangsir 20: Purchased 10 Electric Irons @ Rs. 1,200 each for cash from Kalimati Store.
Solution:
Purchase Book of Kathmandu Electronics
| Date | Particulars | Invoice No. | L.F. | Details (Rs.) | Total Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-08-02 | Pashupati Electric Suppliers, New Road 20 Electric Heaters @ Rs. 1,500 each 15 Rice Cookers @ Rs. 2,000 each Sub-total Less: 10% Trade Discount | 114 | 30,000 30,000 60,000 (6,000) | 54,000 | |
| 2082-08-14 | Everest Appliances, Birgunj 10 Refrigerators @ Rs. 25,000 each 20 Table Fans @ Rs. 2,500 each Sub-total Add: Packing and delivery charges | 209 | 2,50,000 50,000 3,00,000 2,000 | 3,02,000 | |
| 2082-08-30 | Total — Purchase A/c (Dr.) | 3,56,000 |
Notes on Excluded Transactions:
- Mangsir 8: Purchase of 2 office tables from Surya Furniture is excluded because office furniture is a fixed asset, not merchandise goods for resale.
- Mangsir 20: Purchase of 10 Electric Irons from Kalimati Store is excluded because it is a cash purchase (recorded in the Cash Book).
2. Sales Book & Sales Return Book
- Sales Book Columns:
Date|Particulars (Name of Customer/Debtor & Item Details)|Invoice No.|L.F.|Details (Rs.)|Total Amount (Rs.) - Sales Return Book Columns:
Date|Particulars (Name of Customer & Returned Items)|Credit Note No.|L.F.|Details (Rs.)|Total Amount (Rs.)
Worked Illustration 14.2: Sales Book and Sales Return Book
Question: From the following transactions of Mechi Tea & Grocery House, Jhapa, prepare (a) Sales Book and (b) Sales Return Book:
- Poush 3: Sold on credit to Pokharel General Store, Damak (Bill No. 501):
- 50 kg Orthodox Tea @ Rs. 600 per kg
- 100 kg Sugar @ Rs. 110 per kg
- Less: 10% Trade Discount
- Poush 8: Pokharel General Store returned 5 kg damaged Orthodox Tea @ Rs. 600 per kg (Credit Note No. 12). (Note: Since a 10% trade discount was allowed on the original sale on Poush 3, the same 10% trade discount must be deducted on the return!)
- Poush 15: Sold to Ilam Mart for cash: 20 kg Coffee @ Rs. 800 per kg.
- Poush 22: Sold on credit to Birtamode Emporium (Bill No. 502):
- 40 jars Honey @ Rs. 750 per jar
- 20 bags Rice @ Rs. 2,200 per bag
- Poush 26: Birtamode Emporium returned 2 broken jars of Honey @ Rs. 750 per jar (Credit Note No. 13).
Solution:
(a) Sales Book of Mechi Tea & Grocery House, Jhapa
| Date | Particulars | Invoice No. | L.F. | Details (Rs.) | Total Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-09-03 | Pokharel General Store, Damak 50 kg Orthodox Tea @ Rs. 600 per kg 100 kg Sugar @ Rs. 110 per kg Sub-total Less: 10% Trade Discount | 501 | 30,000 11,000 41,000 (4,100) | 36,900 | |
| 2082-09-22 | Birtamode Emporium 40 jars Honey @ Rs. 750 per jar 20 bags Rice @ Rs. 2,200 per bag | 502 | 30,000 44,000 | 74,000 | |
| 2082-09-30 | Total — Sales A/c (Cr.) | 1,10,900 |
(Note: Poush 15 cash sale to Ilam Mart is omitted as cash sales are recorded in the Cash Book.)
(b) Sales Return Book of Mechi Tea & Grocery House, Jhapa
| Date | Particulars | Credit Note No. | L.F. | Details (Rs.) | Total Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-09-08 | Pokharel General Store, Damak 5 kg Orthodox Tea @ Rs. 600 per kg Less: 10% Original Trade Discount | 12 | 3,000 (300) | 2,700 | |
| 2082-09-26 | Birtamode Emporium 2 jars Honey @ Rs. 750 per jar | 13 | 1,500 | 1,500 | |
| 2082-09-30 | Total — Sales Return A/c (Dr.) | 4,200 |
14.3 Cash Book: Types, Contra Entries, and Worked Illustrations
A Cash Book is a special subsidiary book in which all cash and bank receipts are recorded on the Debit (left) side and all cash and bank payments are recorded on the Credit (right) side.
Why is the Cash Book called both a Journal (Book of Original Entry) and a Ledger?
- It is a Book of Original Entry (Journal) because all cash and banking transactions are recorded in the Cash Book first directly from source vouchers.
- It is a Ledger Account because it is formatted in a two-sided ‘T’ account (
Dr.Receipts andCr.Payments) and balanced just like a Cash Ledger and Bank Ledger. When a Cash Book is maintained, no separate Cash Account or Bank Account is opened in the Ledger.
Types of Cash Books
- Simple / Single Column Cash Book: Contains only one amount column (
Cash Rs.) on both Debit and Credit sides. - Double Column Cash Book: Contains two amount columns on both Debit and Credit sides:
- (a) Cash and Discount Column Cash Book:
Discount Allowed (Dr.)&Cash (Dr.)|Discount Received (Cr.)&Cash (Cr.). - (b) Bank and Discount Column Cash Book:
Discount Allowed (Dr.)&Bank (Dr.)|Discount Received (Cr.)&Bank (Cr.). - (c) Cash and Bank Column Cash Book:
Cash (Dr.)&Bank (Dr.)|Cash (Cr.)&Bank (Cr.).
- (a) Cash and Discount Column Cash Book:
- Triple Column Cash Book: Contains three amount columns on both sides:
Cash,Bank, andDiscount(Discount Allowedon Dr. side;Discount Receivedon Cr. side).
Concept of Contra Entry (‘C’) in Double (Cash & Bank) and Triple Column Cash Books
When a single transaction simultaneously affects both the Cash Account and the Bank Account in opposite directions on the same date, it is recorded on both the Debit side and the Credit side of the Cash Book and marked with the capital letter C in the L.F. column (indicating that no further posting to the Ledger is needed). Such an entry is called a Contra Entry.
A Contra Entry (‘C’) occurs in ONLY TWO situations:
| Contra Situation | Journal Entry Behind It | Entry on Debit (Receipts) Side of Cash Book | Entry on Credit (Payments) Side of Cash Book |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Cash deposited into the Bank (or Bank Account opened with cash) | Bank A/c ... Dr. To Cash A/c | Write To Cash A/c, put C in L.F., and enter the amount in the BANK Column | Write By Bank A/c, put C in L.F., and enter the amount in the CASH Column |
| 2. Cash withdrawn from the Bank for Office Use (Warning: Withdrawal for personal/domestic use is Drawings, NOT a Contra entry!) | Cash A/c ... Dr. To Bank A/c | Write To Bank A/c, put C in L.F., and enter the amount in the CASH Column | Write By Cash A/c, put C in L.F., and enter the amount in the BANK Column |
Worked Illustration 14.3: Triple Column Cash Book (Cash, Bank, and Discount Columns)
Question: Prepare a Triple Column Cash Book from the following transactions of Annapurna Traders, Chitwan for the month of Magh 2082:
- Magh 1: Cash in hand Rs. 45,000 and Cash at bank Rs. 80,000.
- Magh 4: Purchased goods for Rs. 20,000; paid Rs. 8,000 in cash and the balance Rs. 12,000 by cheque.
- Magh 7: Sold goods for cash Rs. 30,000.
- Magh 10: Deposited cash Rs. 25,000 into the bank. (Contra Entry!)
- Magh 14: Received a cheque of Rs. 19,200 from Deepak in full settlement of his account of Rs. 20,000.
- Magh 18: Paid cash Rs. 14,500 to Rabin in full settlement of his account of Rs. 15,000.
- Magh 22: Withdrew cash Rs. 10,000 from bank for office use and Rs. 5,000 from bank for proprietor’s personal use.
- Magh 27: Paid office salary Rs. 16,000 by cheque and electricity bill Rs. 2,500 in cash.
Solution:
Dr. ………………………………… Triple Column Cash Book of Annapurna Traders ………………………………… Cr.
| Date | Particulars | L.F. | Cash (Rs.) | Bank (Rs.) | Disc. Allowed (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | L.F. | Cash (Rs.) | Bank (Rs.) | Disc. Received (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 082-10-01 | To Balance b/d | 45,000 | 80,000 | — | 082-10-04 | By Purchase A/c | 8,000 | 12,000 | — | ||
| 082-10-07 | To Sales A/c | 30,000 | — | — | 082-10-10 | By Bank A/c | C | 25,000 | — | — | |
| 082-10-10 | To Cash A/c | C | — | 25,000 | — | 082-10-18 | By Rabin’s A/c | 14,500 | — | 500 | |
| 082-10-14 | To Deepak’s A/c | — | 19,200 | 800 | 082-10-22 | By Cash A/c | C | — | 10,000 | — | |
| 082-10-22 | To Bank A/c | C | 10,000 | — | — | 082-10-22 | By Drawing A/c | — | 5,000 | — | |
| 082-10-27 | By Salary A/c | — | 16,000 | — | |||||||
| 082-10-27 | By Electricity A/c | 2,500 | — | — | |||||||
| 082-10-30 | By Balance c/d | 35,000 | 81,200 | — | |||||||
| Total | 85,000 | 1,24,200 | 800 | Total | 85,000 | 1,24,200 | 500 | ||||
| 082-11-01 | To Balance b/d | 35,000 | 81,200 |
Important Rules Observed Above:
- Discount Columns are NEVER Balanced:
Discount Allowed (Dr. Rs. 800)andDiscount Received (Cr. Rs. 500)are simply totalled at the bottom because one is an expense and the other is an income!- Cash Column Always Has a Debit Balance: You cannot spend more physical cash than you have in the cash box.
- Bank Column Normally Has a Debit Balance (or Credit Balance if Bank Overdraft): If a question starts with
Bank Overdraft, enter it on the Credit side asBy Balance b/din the Bank column.
14.4 Concept of Petty Cash Book
To relieve the main cashier from recording dozens of tiny daily expenses (such as Rs. 50 for tea/refreshments, Rs. 30 for postage stamps, Rs. 100 for bus/tempo fare, or Rs. 80 for photocopy), a junior clerk called the Petty Cashier is given a fixed sum of cash (Float / Imprest Amount) at the beginning of each month/week under the Imprest System of Petty Cash. At the end of the period, the exact amount spent by the Petty Cashier is reimbursed by the Chief Cashier so the petty cash balance is restored to the original float.
Things to Remember (Unit 14 Summary)
- Purchase Book and Sales Book record ONLY credit purchases and credit sales of merchandise goods; cash transactions and fixed asset transactions are strictly excluded.
- Contra Entry (
C) occurs in only two cases: (1) Cash deposited into bank, and (2) Cash withdrawn from bank for office use. - In a Triple Column Cash Book, the Cash and Bank columns are balanced (
By Balance c/d), whereas the Discount Allowed and Discount Received columns are merely totalled, never balanced.
Exercises (Unit 14)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Define Subsidiary Books and list any four types.
- What is a Debit Note and a Credit Note?
- Define a Contra Entry and state the two transactions in which it occurs.
- Why are the Discount columns in a Cash Book not balanced?
B. Numerical Problems for Practice (8 Marks Each)
Problem 14.1 (Purchase & Sales Books): From the following transactions of Janakpur Book House, prepare (a) Purchase Book and (b) Sales Book:
- Ashwin 2: Purchased from Ekta Publication, Kathmandu: 50 copies Grade 9 Account Book @ Rs. 400 each and 40 copies Science Book @ Rs. 500 each, less 15% trade discount.
- Ashwin 6: Sold to Mithila Boarding School on credit: 30 copies Grade 9 Account Book @ Rs. 450 each and 20 dozen Exercise Copies @ Rs. 600 per dozen.
- Ashwin 11: Purchased a revolving chair from Janaki Furniture on credit for Rs. 6,500.
- Ashwin 18: Purchased from Buddha Publication: 60 copies Economics Book @ Rs. 350 each, less 10% trade discount.
- Ashwin 24: Sold to Dhanusha Stationery on credit: 40 copies Science Book @ Rs. 550 each, less 10% trade discount.
- Ashwin 28: Sold old newspapers and books for cash Rs. 4,500. (Check Answers: Total of Purchase Book = Rs. 52,900; Total of Sales Book = Rs. 45,300).
Problem 14.2 (Triple Column Cash Book): Prepare a Triple Column Cash Book from the following transactions for Kartik 2082:
- Kartik 1: Cash in hand Rs. 30,000; Cash at bank Rs. 50,000.
- Kartik 5: Cash deposited into bank Rs. 15,000.
- Kartik 9: Goods sold for Rs. 25,000; received Rs. 10,000 in cash and Rs. 15,000 by cheque.
- Kartik 14: Paid to Suman by cheque Rs. 11,600 in full settlement of Rs. 12,000.
- Kartik 19: Received cash from Pratima Rs. 8,700 in full settlement of Rs. 9,000.
- Kartik 24: Withdrew cash from bank for office use Rs. 8,000 and for domestic use Rs. 3,000.
- Kartik 29: Paid rent in cash Rs. 6,000 and salary by cheque Rs. 12,000. (Check Answers: Closing Cash Balance = Rs. 35,700; Closing Bank Balance = Rs. 45,400; Discount Allowed = Rs. 300; Discount Received = Rs. 400).
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 14 Solutions.
UNIT 15: TRIAL BALANCE AND ACCOUNTING ERRORS
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define a Trial Balance and explain its objectives, advantages, and limitations.
- Draw the specimen formats and explain the three methods of preparing a Trial Balance: Total Method, Balance Method, and Mixed/Compound Method.
- Classify any given list of account heads accurately into Debit Balances (Assets, Expenses, Losses, Drawings) and Credit Balances (Capital, Liabilities, Revenues, Gains, Reserves/Provisions).
- Explain Accounting Errors: Errors Disclosed by a Trial Balance vs. Errors Not Disclosed by a Trial Balance (Errors of Omission, Errors of Commission, Errors of Principle, and Compensating Errors).
- Understand the concept and disposal of a Suspense Account and rewrite/correct an inaccurate Trial Balance.
15.1 Meaning, Definition, and Objectives of a Trial Balance
Under the Double Entry System, every transaction has equal Debit and Credit entries. Therefore, when all ledger accounts are balanced at the end of a month or fiscal year, the sum of all Debit balances must equal the sum of all Credit balances. A Trial Balance is a summary schedule or statement of all Debit and Credit balances (or totals) extracted from the Ledger accounts and Cash Book on a particular date to test the arithmetical accuracy of the books of accounts.
“Trial balance is the list of debit and credit balances, taken out from the ledger; it also includes the balances of cash and bank taken from the cash book.” — R.N. Carter
“The statement prepared with the help of ledger balances, at the end of a financial year (or at any other date) to find out whether debit total agrees with credit total is called a Trial Balance.” — William Pickles
Main Objectives and Importance of a Trial Balance
- To Check Arithmetical Accuracy: Agreement of the Debit total and Credit total proves that postings and ledger balancing are arithmetically accurate.
- To Help Locate Accounting Errors: Disagreement between the Debit and Credit columns immediately alerts the accountant that an arithmetical error has been committed in the Journal, Subsidiary Books, or Ledger.
- To Provide a Summarized View of All Accounts: Presents the balances of all Assets, Liabilities, Capital, Expenses, and Incomes on a single sheet of paper.
- To Serve as the Direct Basis for Final Accounts: The Trading Account, Profit & Loss Account, and Balance Sheet are prepared directly from the verified figures of the Trial Balance.
15.2 Methods and Specimen of Preparing a Trial Balance
- Total Method: Records the gross Debit total and gross Credit total of every ledger account before balancing. (Rarely used in practice).
- Balance Method (Most Popular & Standard Method): Records only the net closing balance (
Balance b/d) of each ledger account in either the Debit or Credit column. - Mixed / Compound Method: Combines both the Total Method and Balance Method in a 4-amount-column schedule.
Standard Specimen of a Trial Balance (Balance Method)
Trial Balance of [Name of Business]
As on [Closing Date, e.g., the last day of Ashadh 2082]
| S.N. (1) | Particulars / Name of Account Heads (2) | L.F. (3) | Debit Amount / Balance (Rs.) (4) | Credit Amount / Balance (Rs.) (5) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | [Assets, Expenses, Losses, Drawings] | XX,XXX | — | |
| 2. | [Capital, Liabilities, Incomes, Gains, Reserves] | — | XX,XXX | |
| Grand Total | XXX,XXX | XXX,XXX |
15.3 Comprehensive Master Checklist of Debit vs. Credit Items in a Trial Balance
Whenever you are given an unarranged list of ledger balances in an examination, apply this golden rule:
| DEBIT COLUMN (Dr.) — All Assets, Expenses, Losses, & Drawings | CREDIT COLUMN (Cr.) — Capital, Liabilities, Incomes, Gains, & Provisions |
|---|---|
| • Opening Stock (Note: Closing Stock is normally excluded from the Trial Balance and shown as a footnote because it is already inside Purchases!) • Purchases (and Sales Return / Return Inward) • Cash in Hand and Cash at Bank • Fixed Assets: Land & Building, Plant & Machinery, Furniture & Fixtures, Motor Vehicles, Computers, Premises, Loose Tools • Intangible Assets: Goodwill, Patents, Trademarks, Copyrights • Current Assets: Sundry Debtors (Accounts Receivable / Book Debts), Bills Receivable, Investments, Prepaid (Unexpired) Expenses, Accrued (Receivable) Income • Drawings (Cash or Goods withdrawn by owner) • Operating Expenses: Wages, Salaries, Rent Paid, Carriage Inward, Carriage Outward, Freight & Octroi, Printing & Stationery, Postage & Telegram, Telephone & Internet Charges, Electricity & Water, Insurance Premium, Advertising, Audit Fees, Legal Charges, Repairs & Maintenance, General/Sundry/Trade Expenses • Financial & Non-Cash Losses: Discount Allowed, Interest Paid (Interest on Loan), Commission Paid, Depreciation, Bad Debts Written Off, Loss on Sale of Assets | • Capital Account • Sales (and Purchase Return / Return Outward) • Long-Term Liabilities: Bank Loan, Mortgage Loan, Debentures, Loan from Financial Institutions • Current Liabilities: Sundry Creditors (Accounts Payable), Bills Payable, Bank Overdraft (B.O.D.), Outstanding (Unpaid) Expenses, Advance / Unearned Income (Income received in advance) • Incomes & Gains: Discount Received, Interest Received (Interest on Investment), Commission Received, Rent Received, Dividend Received, Bad Debts Recovered, Apprentice Premium, Gain on Sale of Assets • Reserves & Provisions: General Reserve, Reserve Fund, Capital Reserve, Provision for Bad and Doubtful Debts, Provision for Depreciation, Provision for Discount on Debtors |
15.4 Accounting Errors and Suspense Account
Even experienced bookkeepers occasionally make mistakes while recording or posting transactions. From the viewpoint of the Trial Balance, accounting errors are classified into two categories:
1. Errors Disclosed by a Trial Balance
These are arithmetic or one-sided errors that cause the Debit and Credit totals of the Trial Balance to disagree:
- Omission to post one side of an entry into the Ledger: e.g., Goods sold for cash Rs. 5,000 posted to
Cash A/c (Dr.)but forgotten to be posted toSales A/c (Cr.). - Posting on the wrong side of a Ledger account: e.g., Debiting
Sita's A/cinstead of creditingSita's A/c(causes a double difference!). - Posting a wrong amount to one account: e.g., Posting Rs. 540 to
Purchase A/c (Dr.)while posting Rs. 450 toCreditor A/c (Cr.). - Wrong totaling (casting) of a Subsidiary Book or Ledger account.
- Wrong balancing (
Balance c/d) of a Ledger account. - Omitting a Ledger account balance from the Trial Balance or writing it in the wrong column of the Trial Balance.
2. Errors NOT Disclosed by a Trial Balance
Therefore, agreement of a Trial Balance is NOT conclusive (absolute) proof of the accuracy of the books of accounts! Even when Debit and Credit totals agree to the last rupee, the following four types of errors may still be hidden inside:
| Type of Undisclosed Error | Meaning & Explanation | Concrete Example |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Errors of Complete Omission | A transaction is completely omitted from the Journal or Subsidiary Books, so neither Debit nor Credit is recorded. | Goods worth Rs. 8,000 sold on credit to Hari were completely forgotten to be entered in the Sales Book. Both Dr. and Cr. are short by Rs. 8,000, so the Trial Balance still tallies! |
| 2. Errors of Commission | Recording the wrong amount in the original book or posting to the wrong personal account on the correct side. | (a) Credit sale of Rs. 4,500 to Ram recorded in the Journal as Rs. 5,400 on both Dr. and Cr. sides. (b) Cash Rs. 3,000 received from Shyam posted to the credit side of Ghanshyam’s A/c instead of Shyam’s A/c. |
| 3. Errors of Principle | Violating fundamental accounting principles by confusing Capital Expenditure (Assets) with Revenue Expenditure (Expenses) or vice versa. | (a) Purchasing Machinery for Rs. 50,000 and debiting Purchase A/c instead of Machinery A/c.(b) Paying Rs. 5,000 for routine repair of an old machine and debiting Machinery A/c instead of Repairs A/c. |
| 4. Compensating Errors | Two or more independent errors on opposite sides accidentally cancel out (compensate) each other’s monetary effect. | Purchase A/c (Dr.) is overcast (over-added) by Rs. 1,000, and by coincidence Sales A/c (Cr.) is also overcast by Rs. 1,000. The two mistakes offset each other! |
Suspense Account
When the Debit and Credit totals of a Trial Balance do not agree despite a preliminary check, and the preparation of Final Accounts cannot be delayed, the difference in the Trial Balance is temporarily placed in a newly opened artificial account called the Suspense Account on the shorter side to make the Trial Balance agree. Later, as the underlying one-sided errors are located and rectified through journal entries, the Suspense Account automatically closes!
15.5 Worked Numerical Illustrations
Illustration 15.1: Preparing a Trial Balance from Given Ledger Balances
Question: From the following ledger balances extracted from the books of Lalitpur Emporium as on the last day of Ashadh 2082, prepare a Trial Balance:
- Capital: Rs. 2,50,000 | Opening Stock: Rs. 45,000 | Purchases: Rs. 1,80,000 | Sales: Rs. 3,10,000 | Purchase Return: Rs. 8,000 | Sales Return: Rs. 10,000 | Sundry Debtors: Rs. 65,000 | Sundry Creditors: Rs. 42,000 | Furniture & Fixtures: Rs. 80,000 | Machinery: Rs. 1,20,000 | Cash in Hand: Rs. 22,000 | Bank Overdraft: Rs. 30,000 | Salaries & Wages: Rs. 54,000 | Rent & Taxes: Rs. 24,000 | Discount Allowed: Rs. 4,000 | Discount Received: Rs. 6,000 | Commission Received: Rs. 14,000 | Drawings: Rs. 16,000 | Bad Debts: Rs. 5,000 | Carriage Inward: Rs. 7,000 | Outstanding Rent: Rs. 4,000 | Prepaid Insurance: Rs. 12,000 | Closing Stock (on the last day of Ashadh): Rs. 55,000.
Solution:
Trial Balance of Lalitpur Emporium
As on the last day of Ashadh 2082
| S.N. | Particulars (Account Heads) | L.F. | Debit Balance (Rs.) | Credit Balance (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Capital A/c | — | 2,50,000 | |
| 2. | Opening Stock A/c | 45,000 | — | |
| 3. | Purchases A/c | 1,80,000 | — | |
| 4. | Sales A/c | — | 3,10,000 | |
| 5. | Purchase Return (Return Outward) A/c | — | 8,000 | |
| 6. | Sales Return (Return Inward) A/c | 10,000 | — | |
| 7. | Sundry Debtors A/c | 65,000 | — | |
| 8. | Sundry Creditors A/c | — | 42,000 | |
| 9. | Furniture & Fixtures A/c | 80,000 | — | |
| 10. | Machinery A/c | 1,20,000 | — | |
| 11. | Cash in Hand A/c | 22,000 | — | |
| 12. | Bank Overdraft A/c | — | 30,000 | |
| 13. | Salaries & Wages A/c | 54,000 | — | |
| 14. | Rent & Taxes A/c | 24,000 | — | |
| 15. | Discount Allowed A/c | 4,000 | — | |
| 16. | Discount Received A/c | — | 6,000 | |
| 17. | Commission Received A/c | — | 14,000 | |
| 18. | Drawings A/c | 16,000 | — | |
| 19. | Bad Debts A/c | 5,000 | — | |
| 20. | Carriage Inward A/c | 7,000 | — | |
| 21. | Outstanding Rent A/c | — | 4,000 | |
| 22. | Prepaid Insurance A/c | 12,000 | — | |
| Grand Total | 6,64,000 | 6,64,000 |
(Note: Closing Stock of Rs. 55,000 is an unadjusted year-end valuation already included within Purchases, so it is not included inside the Trial Balance).
Illustration 15.2: Rewriting a Wrong Trial Balance & Opening a Suspense Account
Question: An inexperienced clerk prepared the following wrong Trial Balance, which agreed only by error. Rewrite the Corrected Trial Balance and open a Suspense Account if necessary:
- Debit Items Written by Clerk: Purchases Rs. 90,000 | Capital Rs. 1,20,000 | Creditors Rs. 30,000 | Sales Return Rs. 5,000 | Bank Overdraft Rs. 15,000 | Cash Rs. 20,000 | Total Dr. = Rs. 2,80,000.
- Credit Items Written by Clerk: Sales Rs. 1,50,000 | Debtors Rs. 40,000 | Machinery Rs. 60,000 | Purchase Return Rs. 4,000 | Salaries Rs. 26,000 | Total Cr. = Rs. 2,80,000.
Solution:
Corrected Trial Balance
| S.N. | Particulars | L.F. | Debit (Rs.) | Credit (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Purchases A/c | 90,000 | — | |
| 2. | Capital A/c | — | 1,20,000 | |
| 3. | Creditors A/c | — | 30,000 | |
| 4. | Sales Return A/c | 5,000 | — | |
| 5. | Bank Overdraft A/c | — | 15,000 | |
| 6. | Cash A/c | 20,000 | — | |
| 7. | Sales A/c | — | 1,50,000 | |
| 8. | Debtors A/c | 40,000 | — | |
| 9. | Machinery A/c | 60,000 | — | |
| 10. | Purchase Return A/c | — | 4,000 | |
| 11. | Salaries A/c | 26,000 | — | |
| 12. | Suspense A/c (Balancing Difference: 3,19,000 - 2,41,000) | 78,000 | — | |
| Grand Total | 3,19,000 | 3,19,000 |
Things to Remember (Unit 15 Summary)
- A Trial Balance is a statement of Ledger balances, not an account.
- Debit Column: All Assets, Expenses, Losses, Drawings, Opening Stock, Purchases, Sales Return.
- Credit Column: Capital, Liabilities (including Bank Overdraft & Outstanding Expenses), Incomes/Gains, Sales, Purchase Return, Reserves & Provisions.
- The four errors not disclosed by a Trial Balance are Errors of Omission, Errors of Commission, Errors of Principle, and Compensating Errors.
Exercises (Unit 15)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Define a Trial Balance in one sentence.
- Name the three methods of preparing a Trial Balance.
- Why is the agreement of a Trial Balance not conclusive proof of absolute accuracy?
- When is a Suspense Account opened, and how is it closed?
B. Numerical Problem for Practice (6 Marks)
Problem 15.1: Prepare a Trial Balance of Bhaktapur Traders as on the last day of Chaitra 2082 from the following balances:
- Opening Stock Rs. 25,000 | Purchases Rs. 1,10,000 | Sales Rs. 1,95,000 | Capital Rs. 1,40,000 | Building Rs. 1,20,000 | Debtors Rs. 35,000 | Creditors Rs. 28,000 | Purchase Return Rs. 5,000 | Sales Return Rs. 7,000 | Wages Rs. 18,000 | Salaries Rs. 24,000 | Rent Paid Rs. 12,000 | Commission Received Rs. 6,000 | Cash at Bank Rs. 19,000 | Drawings Rs. 8,000 | Bad Debts Rs. 2,000 | Loan from Bank Rs. 16,000 | Furniture Rs. 10,000. (Check Answer: Trial Balance Grand Total = Rs. 3,90,000 on both Dr. and Cr. sides).
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 15 Solutions.
UNIT 16: GOVERNMENT ACCOUNTING IN NEPAL
Learning Objectives
After completing this unit, students will be able to:
- Define Government Accounting and explain its objectives and importance.
- Differentiate between Government Accounting and Commercial (Business) Accounting.
- Trace the complete Historical Development of Government Accounting in Nepal from the Lichchhavi and Malla periods through the Shah and Rana eras to modern times.
- Explain the Four Historical Accounting Systems practiced in Nepal prior to the New Accounting System:
- Statement of Remainder Accounting System
- Traditional Bookkeeping System (introduced in 1879 A.D. by Chief Clerk Gunwant) including the Primary Daily Record, Daily Sub-Total, Cumulative Grand Total, Classified Ledger, and Final Summary Statement
- Form-Based Accounting System (introduced in 1911 A.D.)
- Payment-Based Accounting System (introduced in 1960 A.D.)
- Describe the origin, features, and levels (Central Level vs. Operating Level) of the New Accounting System of Nepal (2018/2019 B.S.).
- Explain the constitutional and institutional roles of the Office of the Auditor General (OAG), Financial Comptroller General Office (FCGO), and District Treasury Comptroller Office (DTCO).
16.1 Meaning, Definition, and Objectives of Government Accounting
Every sovereign government collects public revenue (taxes, customs duties, royalties, fees, foreign grants, and loans) and spends those public funds on administrative governance, social services (education, health, drinking water), and national infrastructure (roads, hydropower, irrigation).
Government Accounting is the scientific process of recording, classifying, summarizing, reporting, and auditing all financial transactions relating to the receipt, transfer, and expenditure of public funds and government properties in accordance with parliamentary budget appropriations and financial rules.
“Government Accounting is the process of recording, analyzing, classifying, summarizing, communicating, and interpreting financial information about government in aggregate and in detail, reflecting all transactions involving the receipts, transfer, and disposition of government funds and property.” — Oshisami and Dean
Main Objectives of Government Accounting
- Recording Public Revenue and Expenditure: Maintains systematic records of all tax/non-tax revenues collected and budget expenditures incurred by government offices.
- Ensuring Expenditures Stay Within Budget Limits: Prevents any government office from spending more than the amount approved by the Parliament under each specific Budget Head.
- Providing Financial Data for the National Budget: Supplies historical expenditure and revenue figures needed by the Ministry of Finance and National Planning Commission to formulate the upcoming fiscal year’s budget.
- Facilitating Statutory Audit and Preventing Misuse: Provides verifiable vouchers and AGF forms so the Office of the Auditor General can audit public accounts and curb corruption or irregularity (unsettled audit irregularities).
- Safeguarding Public Property (Public Stores & Property): Tracks government land, buildings, vehicles, machinery, and store supplies.
16.2 Differences Between Government Accounting and Commercial Accounting
| Basis of Comparison | Government Accounting | Commercial / Business Accounting |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Users & Organization | Maintained by federal, provincial, and local government ministries, departments, and offices | Maintained by private and public commercial business enterprises |
| 2. Primary Objective | To control public expenditure within parliamentary budget limits and render public service | To ascertain Net Profit or Loss and show the true financial position (Balance Sheet) of the business |
| 3. Basis of Accounting | Prepared primarily on the Cash Basis (and budgetary commitment basis) | Prepared on the Accrual (Mercantile) Basis recording both cash and credit transactions |
| 4. Level Classification | Divided into two distinct levels: Central Level Accounting and Operating Level Accounting | Has no classification into central level and operating level accounting |
| 5. Rules & Forms | Strictly governed by the Financial Procedure and Fiscal Accountability Act and uses standardized Auditor General Forms (AGF) | Governed by GAAP / Nepal Financial Reporting Standards (NFRS) and organizational policies |
| 6. Auditing Authority | Final statutory audit is conducted constitutionally by the Office of the Auditor General, and internal audit by DTCO | Audited by independent Professional Registered / Chartered Accountants (ICAN members) |
16.3 Historical Evolution of Government Accounting in Nepal
The evolution of government accounting in Nepal spans over 1,500 years:
- Lichchhavi and Malla Periods:
- During the Lichchhavi era, state revenue was collected from land and agricultural tax, animal husbandry tax, commercial tax, charitable trusts, and voluntary community labor, and spent on royal administration, war, and temples.
- During the Malla era, expanding trade between India and Tibet made customs duties and minting of coins major sources of state revenue, recorded on palm-leaf and traditional handmade paper scrolls.
- Shah Unification and Early Modern Period (1825 B.S. Onwards):
- After the unification of Nepal in 1825 B.S. (1768 A.D.), King Prithvi Narayan Shah established the State Audit Office in 1769 A.D. to inspect and audit state accounts.
- In 1871 B.S. (1814 A.D.), a Red Seal Revenue Register was introduced to record state revenues and administrative expenditures, followed by a Master Land Assessment Register to record land holdings and land revenue.
- In 1925 B.S. (1868 A.D.), the Civil Personnel Record Office was established to maintain personnel records and salary rolls of civil servants and army personnel (an institution that still operates today as the National Personnel Record Department).
The Four Historical Accounting Systems Used Before the New Accounting System
| Historical System | Year & Propounder | Core Mechanism & Books Used | Why It Was Replaced |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Statement of Remainder System | Early Rana Period (Pre-1936 B.S.) | Based on the Single Entry System for small, short-term projects. Revenues collected were written on one side and expenditures on the other side, closed only at the end of the year or project completion. | Unscientific, incomplete, and unable to classify revenues and expenditures under distinct budget heads as state activities grew. |
| 2. Traditional Bookkeeping System | 1936 B.S. (1879 A.D.) propounded by Chief Clerk Gunwant (remained in practice up to F.Y. 2022/23 B.S.) | Used three famous books: • 1. Primary Daily Record: Recorded on handmade paper folded into 16, 24, or 36 creases (left side = receipts, right side = payments). The daily sub-total closed with a single line was called the Daily Sub-Total, and the cumulative grand total closed with double lines was called the Cumulative Grand Total. Divided into Cash Record, Store/Property Record, and Security Deposit Record. • 2. Classified Ledger: Similar to a modern Ledger, classifying receipts (Revenue Ledger) and expenditures (Expenditure Ledger) by head. • 3. Final Summary Statement: Similar to a Balance Sheet (Job-ending, Month-ending, and Year-ending Summary Statement). | Could not cope with modern developmental budgets and double-entry banking controls after 2007 B.S. |
| 3. Form-Based Accounting System | 1968 B.S. (1911 A.D.) | Introduced specifically to record land revenue in the Terai and urban districts using 51 standardized forms (such as Cashier’s Day Book, 10-Days Report, 15-Days Report, Monthly Pay Sheet). | Confined mainly to land revenue offices and lacked a unified double-entry national framework. |
| 4. Payment-Based Accounting System | 2017 B.S. (1960 A.D.) following the Budget System (2008 B.S.), First Five-Year Plan (2013 B.S.), and Government Fund Expenditure Act 2016 B.S. | First system based on the Double Entry Principle that separated government offices into Central Level Offices (Ministries/Departments) and Operating Level Offices (District/Project Offices) and introduced year-end budget freezing into the Consolidated Fund. | Replaced within two years by the more comprehensive and standardized New Accounting System (2018/2019 B.S.). |
16.4 The New Accounting System of Nepal (2018 / 2019 B.S.)
To design a modern, scientific, and uniform accounting system for the entire country, the Government of Nepal formed a four-member Accounts Committee on 2nd February 1961 A.D. consisting of:
- Accountant General of Nepal — Coordinator / Chairperson
- Under Secretary, Foreign Aid Division, Ministry of Finance — Member
- Public Administration Advisor of USAID — Member
- Accounting Specialist of the United Nations (UNO) — Member
After 288 days of intensive study, the Committee submitted its draft report. The system was approved by the Auditor General on 2nd February 1962 A.D., received royal assent from King Mahendra on 15th March 1962 A.D., and was implemented from Fiscal Year 2019/2020 B.S. (initially in Kathmandu Valley, then Bagmati and Narayani Zones in 2020/21 B.S., and across all districts of Nepal by July 1968 A.D.).
Key Features of the New Accounting System
- Based on Double Entry System: Every transaction is recorded in both Debit and Credit aspects (using Journal Vouchers — AGF No. 10 / 203).
- Based on Cash and Banking Transactions: All revenues and budget releases are routed through bank accounts (Nepal Rastra Bank / commercial banks), and all payments (except petty cash) are made via cheque or electronic fund transfer (EFT / TSA).
- Budgetary Control via Budget Heads: Expenditures are strictly tracked against approved Budget Heads in the Budget Sheet (AGF No. 8 / 208).
- Two-Level Classification:
- Central Level Accounting: Maintained by Constitutional Bodies, Ministries, and Central Departments.
- Operating Level Accounting: Maintained by regional, district, and project offices that receive budget releases and execute ground-level expenditures.
- Uniformity and Simplicity via AGF Forms: Every government office across Nepal uses the exact same numbered Auditor General Forms (updated in 2076 B.S. into the 200-series forms under CGAS—such as Journal Voucher AGF 203, Bank Cash Book AGF 209, Budget Sheet AGF 208, and Monthly Statement of Expenditure AGF 210).
- Use of Brackets
( ): Brackets( )are used in the Budget Sheet and Bank Cash Book to indicate negative figures, credit balances, or deductions (such as advance clearance). - Compulsory Internal and Final Auditing: Internal audit is performed by the DTCO, and final statutory audit is performed by the Office of the Auditor General (OAG).
16.5 Constitutional and Financial Organs of Government Accounting in Nepal
| Institution | Establishment & Constitutional Status | Primary Functions & Responsibilities |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Office of the Auditor General (OAG) | Established on 29 June 1959 A.D. (succeeding the State Audit Office of 1769 A.D.). Governed by Part 22 (Articles 240–241) of the Constitution of Nepal, 2072 B.S. Appointed by the President on the recommendation of the Constitutional Council for a 6-year term. | • Conducts the final statutory audit of all federal, provincial, and local government offices, courts, parliament, army, police, and wholly-owned corporate bodies with due regard to regularity, economy, efficiency, effectiveness, and propriety. • Prescribes and approves all government accounting forms (AGF Forms). • Submits its Annual Audit Report to the President for tabling before the Federal Parliament. |
| 2. Financial Comptroller General Office (FCGO) | Originally established as the Accountant General Office in 2008 B.S. and reorganized as the FCGO in 2032 B.S. under the Ministry of Finance. | • Oversees the Consolidated Fund and national treasury operations (Treasury Single Account — TSA). • Supervises all 77 District Treasury Comptroller Offices (DTCOs) and directs internal auditing. • Prepares the Central Consolidated Financial Statements of the Government of Nepal and submits them to the OAG for final audit. |
| 3. District Treasury Comptroller Office (DTCO) | Established across all districts starting from Fiscal Year 2038/39 B.S. as the district-level operating wing of the FCGO under the Ministry of Finance. | • Releases approved budget funds and authorizes payments through the Treasury Single Account (TSA) for all government offices in the district. • Conducts mandatory internal audit of all operating-level government offices in the district. • Compiles district-wide monthly and annual revenue/expenditure statements for the FCGO. |
Things to Remember (Unit 16 Summary)
- Chief Clerk Gunwant introduced the Traditional Bookkeeping System in 1936 B.S. (using Primary Daily Record, Classified Ledger, and Final Summary Statement; Daily Sub-Total and Cumulative Grand Total).
- The New Accounting System of Nepal was drafted by the Accounts Committee formed on 2 February 1961 A.D., approved by the Auditor General on 2 February 1962 A.D., given royal assent on 15 March 1962 A.D., and implemented from Fiscal Year 2019/20 B.S.
- DTCO conducts the Internal Audit, whereas the Office of the Auditor General (OAG — Part 22 of the Constitution of Nepal) conducts the Final Statutory Audit.
Exercises (Unit 16)
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
- Define Government Accounting.
- When was the State Audit Office and the Civil Personnel Record Office established in Nepal?
- Who propounded the Traditional Bookkeeping System, and in which year?
- Define Daily Sub-Total, Cumulative Grand Total, Classified Ledger, and Final Summary Statement.
- When was the Accounts Committee formed to draft the New Accounting System, and on what date was the New Accounting System approved?
- Which Part of the Constitution of Nepal (2072 B.S.) provides for the Auditor General?
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
- Differentiate between Government Accounting and Commercial Accounting on any five bases.
- Explain the three books used under the Traditional Bookkeeping System (Primary Daily Record, Classified Ledger, and Final Summary Statement).
- Write short notes on: (a) Office of the Auditor General (OAG), (b) Financial Comptroller General Office (FCGO), and (c) District Treasury Comptroller Office (DTCO).
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
- Trace the historical evolution of Government Accounting in Nepal and explain the four accounting systems practiced in Nepal prior to the introduction of the New Accounting System.
- What is the New Accounting System of the Government of Nepal? Explain its major features and importance.
Worked answers to these exercises are in Unit 16 Solutions.
APPENDIX: CDC SPECIFICATION GRID, MODEL QUESTION PAPER, AND ANSWER KEY
A.1 CDC External & Internal Evaluation Framework (Grade 9)
According to the Curriculum Development Centre (CDC), Government of Nepal, the Grade 9 evaluation consists of 75 Marks External Written Examination (3 Hours) and 25 Marks Internal Practical Assessment:
| Assessment Component | Weightage | Breakdown of Marks |
|---|---|---|
| 1. Internal Practical Assessment | 25 Marks | • Class Participation & Attendance: 3 Marks • Practical / Project Work & File Presentation (Drafting letters, Entry/Dispatch registers, Minute, Voucher/Ledger portfolio, Field visit report): 16 Marks • Terminal Examinations: 6 Marks |
| 2. External Written Examination (3 Hours) | 75 Marks | • Group A — Very Short Answer Questions: 11 Questions × 1 Mark = 11 Marks • Group B — Short Answer & Practical Questions: 8 Questions × 5 Marks = 40 Marks • Group C — Long Analytical & Numerical Questions: 3 Questions × 8 Marks = 24 Marks |
A.2 Full-Length Model Question Paper (75 Marks)
ANNUAL EXAMINATION MODEL QUESTION PAPER — GRADE 9
Subject: Office Operations and Accounting
Full Marks: 75 | Time: 3 Hours
Group ‘A’ — Very Short Answer Questions (11 × 1 = 11 Marks)
Answer all the questions in one sentence each:
- Define an office according to the modern functional view.
- Who is a Receptionist?
- Under which regulation are dead records disposed of in government offices of Nepal?
- When did Nepal become a member of the Universal Postal Union (UPU)?
- What is meant by Entrepôt Trade?
- State the minimum and maximum number of shareholders in a Private Limited Company in Nepal.
- What is meant by Quorum of a meeting?
- Who propounded the Double Entry System of bookkeeping, and in which year?
- State the Fundamental Accounting Equation.
- In which two situations does a Contra Entry (‘C’) occur in a Cash Book?
- Define Daily Sub-Total and Cumulative Grand Total under the Traditional Bookkeeping System.
Group ‘B’ — Short Answer and Practical Questions (8 × 5 = 40 Marks)
- What is an office? Explain any four basic functions of an office.
(1 + 4 = 5) - Define Office Resources and explain any four types of office resources used in a modern organization.
(1 + 4 = 5) - Differentiate between an Ordinary Letter and a Registered Letter, and draw a neat specimen of an Entry Book (Incoming Mail Register).
(3 + 2 = 5) - Define a Partnership Firm and differentiate between a Private Limited Company and a Public Limited Company on any four bases.
(1 + 4 = 5) - Differentiate between Bookkeeping and Accounting, and explain the Business Entity Concept and Money Measurement Concept.
(3 + 2 = 5) - From the following transactions of Bagmati Garment House, Kathmandu, prepare a Purchase Book:
(5)- Shrawan 3: Purchased from Hetauda Textile Mills (Invoice No. 45): 40 shirts @ Rs. 800 each and 30 trousers @ Rs. 1,200 each, less 10% trade discount.
- Shrawan 10: Purchased from Biratnagar Cotton Suppliers (Invoice No. 78): 25 jackets @ Rs. 2,000 each and 20 sweaters @ Rs. 1,000 each.
- Shrawan 18: Purchased a sewing machine and office table for office use from Patan Furniture on credit for Rs. 25,000.
- Shrawan 25: Purchased 15 T-shirts @ Rs. 500 each for cash from New Road Store.
- Prepare a Trial Balance of Pokhara Traders as on the last day of Ashadh 2082 from the following ledger balances:
(5)- Capital: Rs. 2,00,000 | Opening Stock: Rs. 30,000 | Purchases: Rs. 1,40,000 | Sales: Rs. 2,50,000 | Debtors: Rs. 50,000 | Creditors: Rs. 35,000 | Machinery: Rs. 1,50,000 | Cash at Bank: Rs. 40,000 | Bank Overdraft: Rs. 20,000 | Salaries: Rs. 45,000 | Rent Paid: Rs. 25,000 | Purchase Return: Rs. 6,000 | Sales Return: Rs. 8,000 | Drawings: Rs. 15,000 | Discount Allowed: Rs. 5,000 | Commission Received: Rs. 7,000 | Bad Debts: Rs. 10,000.
- Differentiate between Government Accounting and Commercial Accounting on any five bases.
(5)
Group ‘C’ — Long Analytical and Numerical Questions (3 × 8 = 24 Marks)
- Draft an imaginary Order Letter from Koshi Educational Suppliers, Biratnagar to CDC Textbook Distributors, Bhaktapur ordering textbooks for Grade 9, OR draft a complete Minute of a Meeting of your School Management Committee regarding the establishment of a Science and Accounting Library.
(8) - Journalize the following transactions in the books of Manakamana Enterprises for Chaitra 2082 and also prepare Cash Account and Ramesh’s Account:
(5 + 3 = 8)- Chaitra 1: Started business with cash Rs. 2,50,000 and furniture Rs. 50,000.
- Chaitra 5: Purchased goods on credit from Ramesh for Rs. 60,000.
- Chaitra 10: Sold goods for cash Rs. 45,000.
- Chaitra 15: Returned defective goods worth Rs. 5,000 to Ramesh.
- Chaitra 20: Paid cash Rs. 53,500 to Ramesh in full settlement of his account.
- Chaitra 25: Withdrew cash Rs. 8,000 by the proprietor for personal use.
- Chaitra 30: Paid staff salary Rs. 20,000 in cash.
- Prepare a Triple Column Cash Book from the following transactions for the month of Falgun 2082:
(8)- Falgun 1: Cash in hand Rs. 40,000 and Cash at bank Rs. 75,000.
- Falgun 4: Goods purchased for Rs. 25,000; paid Rs. 10,000 in cash and Rs. 15,000 by cheque.
- Falgun 8: Cash deposited into bank Rs. 20,000.
- Falgun 12: Received a cheque of Rs. 28,500 from Sita in full settlement of her account of Rs. 30,000.
- Falgun 17: Paid cash Rs. 19,200 to Gopal in full settlement of his account of Rs. 20,000.
- Falgun 22: Cash withdrawn from bank Rs. 12,000 for office use and Rs. 4,000 for domestic use.
- Falgun 28: Paid rent Rs. 10,000 by cheque and stationery Rs. 2,000 in cash.
A.3 Answer Key to Model Question Paper Numericals
- Answer to Q.17 (Purchase Book):
- Shrawan 3 (Hetauda Textile Mills):
(40 × 800) + (30 × 1,200) = 32,000 + 36,000 = 68,000 - 10% TD (6,800)= Rs. 61,200. - Shrawan 10 (Biratnagar Cotton Suppliers):
(25 × 2,000) + (20 × 1,000) = 50,000 + 20,000= Rs. 70,000. - Shrawan 18 (Fixed Asset) and Shrawan 25 (Cash Purchase) are excluded.
- Total Purchase A/c (Dr.) = Rs. 1,31,200.
- Shrawan 3 (Hetauda Textile Mills):
- Answer to Q.18 (Trial Balance):
- Debit Items: Opening Stock (30,000) + Purchases (1,40,000) + Debtors (50,000) + Machinery (1,50,000) + Cash at Bank (40,000) + Salaries (45,000) + Rent Paid (25,000) + Sales Return (8,000) + Drawings (15,000) + Discount Allowed (5,000) + Bad Debts (10,000) = Rs. 5,18,000.
- Credit Items: Capital (2,00,000) + Sales (2,50,000) + Creditors (35,000) + Bank Overdraft (20,000) + Purchase Return (6,000) + Commission Received (7,000) = Rs. 5,18,000.
- Answer to Q.21 (Journal & Ledgers):
- Closing Debit Balance of Cash A/c (
By Balance c/d):2,50,000 + 45,000 - 53,500 - 8,000 - 20,000= Rs. 2,13,500. - Ramesh’s A/c: Credit side
By Purchase A/c Rs. 60,000equals Debit sideTo Purchase Return A/c Rs. 5,000 + To Cash A/c Rs. 53,500 + To Discount Received A/c Rs. 1,500 = Rs. 60,000(Closed/Settled).
- Closing Debit Balance of Cash A/c (
- Answer to Q.22 (Triple Column Cash Book):
- Closing Cash Balance (
By Balance c/d):Receipts (40,000 + 12,000 = 52,000) - Payments (10,000 + 20,000 + 19,200 + 2,000 = 51,200)= Rs. 800. - Closing Bank Balance (
By Balance c/d):Receipts (75,000 + 20,000 + 28,500 = 1,23,500) - Payments (15,000 + 12,000 + 4,000 + 10,000 = 41,000)= Rs. 82,500. - Discount Allowed Total (Dr.) = Rs. 1,500; Discount Received Total (Cr.) = Rs. 800.
- Closing Cash Balance (
Full worked answers to every question in the paper are in Model Question Paper Solutions.
Unit 1 Solutions: Office and Office Personnel
Answers to the Unit 1 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Define an office in one sentence.
An office is the administrative centre of an organization where information is collected, recorded, processed, preserved and communicated so that management can plan and control its activities.
2. What is meant by the basic functions of an office?
The basic functions of an office are the routine information-handling functions that every office performs, whatever its size: collecting, recording, processing, storing and communicating information.
3. Give two examples of government business offices in Nepal.
Nepal Telecom and Nepal Oil Corporation.
4. What is a service-motive office? Give two examples operating in Nepal.
A service-motive office is an office set up to provide social, humanitarian, cultural or educational welfare without any profit motive, such as the Nepal Red Cross Society and Maiti Nepal.
5. Who is an Office Chief?
The Office Chief is the top-level administrative head of an office (such as a CEO, General Manager, Principal or, in the civil service, a Secretary or Chief District Officer) who plans its work, delegates authority, approves expenditure and represents it externally.
6. Name any two ranks of office personnel in the Nepal Civil Service.
Under Secretary and Section Officer (others include Joint Secretary and Non-Gazetted First Class Assistant).
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Explain the four basic (information-handling) functions of a modern office.
A modern office works as an information pipeline. Its four basic functions are:
- Collecting and receiving information: The office gathers internal information (departmental reports, attendance, stock levels, cash balances) and external information (letters, invoices, circulars, emails, government directives and customer inquiries).
- Recording information: The collected information is written down systematically in entry books, journals, ledgers, minutes and registers, so that it can be verified later and produced as legal evidence.
- Processing and arranging information: Raw data is sorted, classified, calculated and summarized into a useful form; for example, hundreds of daily sales bills are turned into a monthly sales summary, a Trial Balance or an Income Statement.
- Communicating (supplying) information: Processed reports are supplied upward to top management for decisions, and orders, budgets and guidelines are passed downward to departments and outward to customers, creditors and regulators.
Many books add a fifth function, storing and preserving information, in which records are protected through filing and indexing for future use.
2. Differentiate between a Government Office and a Business Office on any four bases.
| Basis | Government Office | Business Office |
|---|---|---|
| Objective | Rendering public services, maintaining law and order, collecting revenue and building infrastructure | Earning profit through the production and distribution of goods and services |
| Ownership and control | Wholly owned, funded and controlled by the Government of Nepal (federal, provincial or local) | Owned by private individuals or shareholders, or by the government holding more than 51% of the shares |
| Source of income | Tax revenue (income tax, VAT, customs), non-tax revenue (fees, fines, royalties) and foreign grants or loans | Sale of goods and services, capital from owners or shareholders, and bank loans |
| Accounting system | Cash-based Government Accounting System (New Accounting System) | Double-entry commercial accounting on an accrual basis |
| Audit | Audited by the Office of the Auditor General | Audited by independent registered auditors (Chartered Accountants) |
| Examples | Ministries, Inland Revenue Department, District Administration Office, Ward Offices | Nepal Telecom, Nepal Oil Corporation, Bhat-Bhateni Supermarket, Himalayan Bank |
3. Distinguish between a Permanent Office and a Temporary Office with suitable examples from Nepal.
| Basis | Permanent Office | Temporary (Ad-hoc) Office |
|---|---|---|
| Meaning | An office set up to carry out continuous, long-term operations | An office set up for a specific project, event or fixed period |
| Duration | Has no fixed closing date | Is dissolved as soon as its task is completed |
| Purpose | Regular, recurring functions such as administration, banking or teaching | A one-time task such as a census, an election, disaster relief or a trade fair |
| Staff and structure | Permanent staff and a stable organizational structure | Mostly deputed or contract staff and a small, task-based structure |
| Examples in Nepal | Ministry of Finance, Nepal Rastra Bank, Tribhuvan University, commercial banks | National Population Census Office, Election Officer’s Office during general elections, Melamchi Water Supply Project site office |
4. Who is a Sectional Chief? State any four functions performed by a Sectional Chief.
A Sectional Chief is the middle-level head of a particular section or department of an office, such as the Account Officer, HR Manager, Procurement Head or Exam Coordinator. In the Nepal Civil Service, this post is usually held by an Under Secretary or a Section Officer. The Sectional Chief works under the Office Chief and above the Office Assistants.
Functions of a Sectional Chief:
- Leading the section: Plans and organizes the work of the section so that it meets the targets set by the Office Chief.
- Supervising assistants: Divides work among the office assistants, guides them and checks the quality of their work.
- Verifying documents: Checks vouchers, accounts, letters and official memo drafts prepared by the assistants before they go to the Office Chief.
- Reporting progress: Reports the progress and problems of the section to the Office Chief and coordinates with other sections.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. “The office is to a business what the mainspring is to a watch.” In light of this statement, explain the importance of an office to a modern organization.
The mainspring of a watch is the part that drives every other part; if it stops, the watch stops. In the same way, the office drives every department of a business. Just as the brain receives signals and directs the body, the office receives information, processes it, and directs production, purchasing, sales, finance and personnel. The importance of an office can be explained as follows:
- Information centre (data bank): The office stores past and current figures on sales, costs, assets and liabilities. Management uses this information for forecasting, budgeting and planning.
- Channel of communication: The office links top executives with operating workers, and the organization with suppliers, banks, customers and government agencies.
- Coordination: The office harmonizes the work of the production, purchasing, marketing, human resources and finance departments so that they work toward one goal.
- Managerial control: The office supplies standards and actual performance reports, which managers use to measure performance and correct deviations.
- Service to workers: The office keeps attendance records and prepares wage and salary sheets, bonus calculations and provident fund contributions on time.
- Link with shareholders and creditors: The office issues share certificates, dividend warrants, meeting notices and financial statements to investors, and keeps payment schedules for creditors.
- Service to customers: The office handles customer inquiries, quotations, orders, invoices and after-sales complaints promptly.
- Legal and government obligations: The office files tax returns, renews business registrations, complies with labour laws and keeps the statutory records required by the Government of Nepal.
Conclusion: Without an office, no department would receive the information or instructions it needs, and the business would stop just as a watch stops without its mainspring. The statement is therefore fully justified: the office is the nerve centre that keeps a modern organization running.
2. What is meant by office personnel? Explain the three types of office personnel and describe the major functions of an Office Chief (Office Manager).
Meaning: Office personnel are all the human resources of an office, from the top executive to the lowest support staff, who apply their physical and mental efforts to achieve the goals of the organization. According to Beach, “The office personnel refers to all the employees of the office comprising the chief, sectional chiefs, and assistants who jointly work for the attainment of the organizational goals.”
Types of office personnel:
- Office Chief (top level): The administrative head of the whole office, such as a CEO, Managing Director, General Manager, Principal or Office Manager. In the Nepal Civil Service, this is a Secretary, Joint Secretary, Under Secretary or Chief District Officer, depending on the level of the office.
- Sectional Chief (middle level): The head of a section or department, such as an Account Officer, HR Manager or Procurement Head (an Under Secretary or Section Officer in the civil service). The Sectional Chief supervises assistants, verifies their work and reports to the Office Chief.
- Office Assistant (operating level): The staff who carry out the day-to-day clerical work, such as accountants, receptionists, personal assistants, computer operators and filing clerks (non-gazetted assistants, junior clerks and office helpers in the civil service). They register mail, draft letters, write the books of accounts, file documents and serve visitors.
Functions of an Office Chief:
- Planning: Formulates the plans, programmes and annual budget of the office.
- Organizing and delegating: Divides the work into sections and delegates authority and responsibility to sectional chiefs.
- Directing and maintaining discipline: Guides and motivates staff, and enforces office rules and discipline.
- Coordinating: Harmonizes the work of different sections so that they do not duplicate or contradict one another.
- Controlling expenditure: Approves financial expenditure and checks actual performance against the plan.
- Staffing: Takes part in the recruitment, training, promotion and evaluation of staff.
- Decision making: Takes the final decisions on important matters referred by the sections.
- Representing the office: Represents the office in dealings with the government, other organizations and the public.
Conclusion: The three levels of office personnel work as a team: the Office Chief decides, the Sectional Chiefs supervise, and the Office Assistants carry out the work. The efficiency of the whole office depends largely on the leadership of the Office Chief.
D. Project Work / Practical Assignment
This is a field assignment, so each student’s chart will differ. A good chart puts the Office Chief at the top, the Sectional Chiefs in the middle row and the Office Assistants under the section they work in, with two daily duties beside each post. A sample for a school administrative office:
| Level | Post | Two daily duties |
|---|---|---|
| Office Chief | Principal | Approves vouchers and expenditure; signs letters and notices sent out by the school |
| Sectional Chief | Administrative Head | Allocates clerical work to assistants; checks letters and notices before the Principal signs them |
| Sectional Chief | Account Officer | Verifies vouchers and fee receipts; prepares the daily cash and bank position for the Principal |
| Office Assistant | Accountant | Records receipts and payments in the cash book; posts entries to the ledger |
| Office Assistant | Clerk (Receptionist) | Registers incoming and outgoing letters in the Entry and Dispatch registers; receives visitors and answers phone calls |
| Office Assistant | Office Helper | Delivers files and letters between sections; opens, cleans and closes the office |
End the report with the date of the visit, the name of the person interviewed, and one or two things you learned about how the office works.
Unit 2 Solutions: Office Assistant
Answers to the Unit 2 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Who is an Office Assistant?
An Office Assistant is an operating-level employee who performs the routine clerical, administrative and accounting work of an office under the direction and supervision of the Office Chief and Sectional Chiefs, such as a Non-Gazetted Clerical Assistant, a Computer Operator or a Junior Accountant.
2. Who is a Personal Assistant (P.A.)?
A Personal Assistant (P.A.), or Private Secretary, is an office assistant appointed to assist one specific high-ranking executive, such as a Minister, Secretary, Managing Director or CEO, by managing the executive’s appointment diary, calls, visitors and confidential correspondence.
3. State the primary duty of a Receptionist.
The primary duty of a Receptionist is to welcome visitors courteously at the main entrance or inquiry desk, give them general information about the organization and direct them to the concerned section.
4. What is meant by a Sectional Clerk?
A Sectional Clerk (Departmental Assistant) is an office assistant assigned to one functional section, such as Accounts, Administration, Procurement, Store or Exam, who performs the specialized clerical work of that section.
5. Mention any two academic or technical qualifications required for an Office Assistant.
Minimum academic qualification (for example, SEE for a Non-Gazetted Second Class Assistant or Grade 12 for a Non-Gazetted First Class Assistant) and computer and IT literacy (word processing, spreadsheets, email and accounting software such as Tally).
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Explain the three types of Office Assistants with examples.
Based on the nature of the duties assigned, office assistants are classified into three types:
- Personal Assistant (P.A.) / Private Secretary: A P.A. is appointed to assist one specific high-ranking executive. He or she manages the executive’s daily appointment diary, screens phone calls and visitors, handles confidential correspondence, takes dictation and arranges travel and meeting schedules. Examples: the P.A. to a Minister, to the Secretary of a ministry, or to the Managing Director of a company.
- Receptionist (Front Desk Officer): The receptionist is stationed at the main entrance or inquiry desk. He or she welcomes visitors courteously, answers incoming telephone calls, keeps the visitor logbook, gives general information about the organization and directs guests to the concerned section. Examples: the front desk officer of a commercial bank, the inquiry desk of a hospital, or the reception of a hotel.
- Sectional Clerk (Departmental Assistant): The sectional clerk is assigned to one functional section, such as Accounts, Administration, Procurement, Store or Exam, and performs the specialized clerical work of that section. Examples: an Accounts Clerk prepares journal vouchers, posts the ledger, writes the cash book and files bills, while an Administration Clerk handles mail entry, mail dispatch and leave records.
2. Describe any five daily functions performed by an Office Assistant.
The day-to-day work of an office is carried out by its assistants. Five of their daily functions are:
- Receiving and dispatching mail: The assistant receives incoming letters, stamps them with the date of receipt and records them in the Entry Book. Outgoing letters are recorded in the Dispatch Book before they are sent out.
- Drafting letters and official memos: The assistant writes routine business letters, quotations, orders, notices and circulars, and initiates Official Memos (notes for decision-making) with supporting documents for approval by higher officers.
- Typing, computing and data entry: The assistant operates computers, word processors, spreadsheets, accounting software, scanners and photocopiers to prepare clean documents and reports.
- Filing and indexing documents: Letters, vouchers, contracts and reports are arranged systematically in files, and indexes are prepared so that any document can be located instantly.
- Maintaining books of accounts and store records: The assistant records daily financial transactions in the journal, subsidiary books, ledger and cash book (or AGF forms in government offices), and keeps the store ledger (Inventory Register).
Office assistants also attend to visitors and telephone calls, and prepare for meetings and seminars by distributing notices and agendas and helping to draft the minutes.
3. Differentiate between the qualifications and qualities of an Office Assistant.
| Basis | Qualifications | Qualities |
|---|---|---|
| Meaning | The formal education, technical training and practical knowledge required to perform a job effectively | The personal and behavioural traits that make an assistant trustworthy and efficient |
| How acquired | Earned through study, training courses and work experience | Developed through upbringing, habits, attitude and self-discipline |
| Nature | Formal and technical (what the assistant knows and can do) | Personal and behavioural (how the assistant behaves and works) |
| Proof | Shown by certificates, degrees, training records and examination results | Shown through behaviour; judged in interviews and observed on the job |
| Components | Academic level, language proficiency, computer and IT literacy, knowledge of accounting and office procedures, knowledge of laws and rules | Personal appearance and health, politeness, punctuality, honesty and loyalty, secrecy, tactfulness and initiative, team spirit |
| Examples | SEE or Grade 12 pass, a diploma in computerized accounting, knowledge of PAN, VAT and TDS | Greeting a frustrated customer politely; refusing to leak a tender or examination paper |
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. Why is the Office Assistant considered the operational backbone of an office? Explain the essential personal and professional qualities required of a successful Office Assistant.
The backbone holds the body upright and lets every limb move. In an office, the Office Chief decides and the Sectional Chiefs supervise, but it is the Office Assistants who actually carry out the routine work every day. They are called the operational backbone of the office because:
- They execute the day-to-day work: Receiving and dispatching mail, drafting letters, typing, filing and keeping the books of accounts are all done by assistants. If they stop, the office stops.
- They keep the records that management relies on: The vouchers, ledgers, cash books, store records and files kept by assistants are the information on which officers base their decisions.
- They are the first point of contact: The receptionist and other assistants are the first people visitors, customers and citizens meet, so they shape the public image of the office.
- They free officers for planning and decisions: By managing diaries, calls, correspondence and meeting arrangements, P.A.s and clerks let executives concentrate on policy and decision making.
Essential qualities of a successful Office Assistant:
Personal qualities
- Personal appearance and health: A neat, clean and formal appearance suited to the workplace creates a good impression, and good physical and mental stamina lets the assistant handle long hours and heavy workloads.
- Politeness and courtesy: The assistant speaks respectfully, using expressions such as “Good morning,” “Please,” “Thank you” and “How may I help you?”, even with frustrated customers or under pressure.
- Honesty and loyalty: Assistants handle cash, cheques and purchases, so financial integrity is essential. They must also remain loyal to the organization and its mission.
- Cooperativeness and team spirit: Office work passes from section to section, so the assistant must work in harmony with colleagues and support supervisors willingly.
Professional qualities
- Punctuality and regularity: Arriving at the office on time every day and completing assigned tasks within deadlines keeps the work flowing and prevents files from piling up.
- Secrecy (confidentiality): The assistant must never leak confidential office decisions, tenders, examination papers, financial figures or client records to unauthorized outsiders.
- Tactfulness and initiative: A good assistant handles delicate or unexpected situations calmly and completes routine matters without waiting to be told every step.
- Accuracy and orderliness: Letters, figures, dates and amounts must be correct, and files must be kept in order, because a small clerical error in a voucher or a letter can cause financial loss or legal trouble.
These qualities work together with the qualifications described in the unit: academic education, language proficiency, computer literacy and knowledge of accounting, office procedures and rules.
Conclusion: Office Assistants carry the routine load of the office, keep its records and meet its public, so the office cannot function without them. An assistant who is polite, honest, punctual, discreet, cooperative and accurate makes the whole office efficient and trustworthy, which is why these qualities are as important as formal qualifications.
Unit 3 Solutions: Office Resources
Answers to the Unit 3 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. What is meant by office resources?
Office resources are all the productive inputs, commonly summarized as the 5 Ms (Manpower, Money, Materials, Machines and Methods/Information) plus transportation and communication facilities, that an office uses to perform its administrative and operational activities.
2. Why is manpower considered the most active resource of an office?
Manpower is the only active, living resource: it thinks, plans, decides and puts all the other passive resources (money, materials, machines) to use, and without it they remain idle and unproductive.
3. Differentiate between technical manpower and administrative manpower in one sentence.
Technical manpower are specialists with professional skills, such as engineers, doctors, IT specialists and chartered accountants, whereas administrative manpower are the chiefs, managers, officers and clerks who plan, manage and carry out the general administrative work of the office.
4. Give two examples of durable physical resources and two examples of consumable office materials.
Durable physical resources: furniture and computers. Consumable office materials: paper and ink/toner.
5. State the primary source of financial resource for a government office.
The primary source of finance for a government office is tax revenue (such as income tax, VAT and customs duties), supported by royalties and grants.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Explain the importance of office resources for the smooth operation of an organization.
Just as a factory cannot produce goods without raw materials and machines, an office cannot collect, process or communicate information without resources. Their importance is explained below:
- Smooth and continuous operation: An adequate supply of stationery, electricity, internet and funds prevents work stoppages and administrative bottlenecks, so the office runs without interruption.
- Higher efficiency and productivity: Modern office machines such as computers, high-speed scanners and accounting software let a single assistant finish in minutes what once took days of manual clerical labour.
- Accuracy and reliability of work: Automated calculation tools, standardized forms and trained accountants reduce arithmetic and clerical errors in financial records.
- Economy and cost reduction: Proper planning and use of resources prevents the wastage of paper, energy, time and funds, which lowers the cost of running the office.
Good office resources also raise employee morale (well-lit, ventilated workspaces and comfortable furniture reduce fatigue) and build the prestige and goodwill of the organization among clients and the public.
2. What is human resource (manpower)? Explain its types with examples.
Human resource (manpower) means all the people who work in an office, from the chief to the clerks and technical specialists, and who apply their physical and mental efforts to achieve its goals. It is the only active, living resource of the office; it thinks, plans, decides and executes, and it mobilizes all the other resources.
Human resources in an office are of two types:
- Administrative staff (administrative manpower): These are the people who plan, organize, direct and carry out the general administrative and clerical work of the office. Examples: Office Chiefs, Managers, Officers, Accountants, Receptionists and Clerks in a ministry, a bank or a school office.
- Technical staff (technical manpower): These are specialists who have professional or technical training in a particular field and do work that requires that expertise. Examples: Engineers in the Department of Roads, Doctors in a hospital, IT Specialists who manage an office’s computer network, and Chartered Accountants who audit accounts.
Both types must be managed well, through scientific recruitment, placing the right person in the right job, training, fair remuneration and motivation, because the use of every other resource depends on them.
3. Describe the sources of finance for Government, Business, and Service-Motive offices.
Finance is the lifeblood of every office: it pays salaries, rent and utilities and buys assets. Each type of office raises it from different sources:
- Government offices:
- Tax revenue: income tax, VAT, customs and other duties collected from the public, which is the main source.
- Non-tax revenue: royalties, fees, fines and charges for government services.
- Grants and loans: foreign grants and loans from friendly countries and international agencies; provincial and local governments also receive grants from the federal government.
- Business offices:
- Capital: money invested by the proprietor, partners or shareholders.
- Sales revenue: income from selling goods and services, which is the regular source once the business is running.
- Loans: loans from banks and financial institutions for buying assets or meeting working capital needs.
- Service-motive offices:
- Donations: contributions from individuals, businesses and well-wishers.
- Subscriptions: regular membership fees paid by members.
- Grants: support from the government and from national and international agencies for welfare programmes, as received by organizations such as the Nepal Red Cross Society.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. Define office resources and explain all major types of office resources used in a modern office in Nepal.
Office resources are all the productive inputs, commonly summarized in management as the 5 Ms (Men/Manpower, Money, Materials, Machines and Methods/Information) plus transportation and communication facilities, that an office uses to perform its administrative and operational activities. An office cannot collect, process or communicate information without skilled employees, working capital, stationery, computers, internet connectivity and vehicles. The major types of office resources are:
- Human resources (manpower): These include administrative staff (chiefs, managers, officers and clerks) and technical staff (engineers, doctors, IT specialists and chartered accountants). Manpower is the only active, living resource; it thinks, plans, decides and puts every other resource to work. It requires scientific recruitment, right-person-in-right-job placement, training, fair remuneration and motivation.
- Financial resources (finance): Government offices depend on taxes, customs, royalties and grants; business offices on capital, sales revenue and bank loans; and service-motive offices on donations and subscriptions. Finance is the lifeblood of the office, used to pay salaries, rent and utilities and to buy assets. It requires strict budgeting, internal control, double-entry accounting and periodic auditing.
- Physical and material resources: These are divided into durable goods (fixed assets used for more than one year, such as land, buildings, furniture, computers and vehicles) and consumable stationery (used up in day-to-day work, such as paper, pens, files, ink/toner and stamps). They provide the workspace, tools and supplies needed for daily clerical work, and require proper procurement, recording in the store ledger (Inventory Register), regular maintenance and insurance.
- Communication resources: Telephone, mobile, email, internet, intranet, website, fax, postal service and notice boards enable the rapid internal and external exchange of messages, orders, reports and invoices. The choice of medium depends on urgency, cost, confidentiality and the need for written legal proof.
- Transportation resources: Land transport (bikes, cars, buses, trucks), air transport (domestic and international flights, helicopters) and water transport (ships and ferries) carry executives, field staff, mail and office supplies to branches and clients. In Nepal’s hills and mountains, geography is a major factor; a helicopter or domestic flight may be the only quick way to reach a remote district, while the choice also depends on distance, urgency and cost.
- Intellectual and informational resources: Software systems, databases, patents, copyrights, standard operating manuals and institutional memory support innovation, data security and better decision making in modern digital offices. They are protected through cybersecurity, regular backups and intellectual property laws.
Conclusion: A modern office in Nepal needs all six types of resources working together: people to run it, money to pay for it, materials and machines to work with, communication and transport to connect it, and information to guide it. Among them, human resource is the supreme resource, because all other resources remain idle and unproductive without competent human direction.
Unit 4 Solutions: Office Correspondence
Answers to the Unit 4 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks, with a complete model draft for each drafting question.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Define office correspondence.
Office correspondence is the formal exchange of written information, ideas, inquiries, orders or decisions between two or more individuals or organizations through letters, notices, circulars or electronic mail.
2. When is a quotation letter written?
A quotation letter is written by a supplier in reply to an inquiry letter from a prospective buyer, quoting the exact unit prices, trade and cash discounts, transport charges and payment terms.
3. What is meant by Mail Entry (Incoming Registration) and Mail Dispatch (Outgoing Registration)?
Mail Entry is the process of receiving incoming letters, opening them, stamping the receipt date and recording their details chronologically in the Entry Book (Incoming Mail Register). Mail Dispatch is the process of collecting signed outgoing letters, checking their signatures and enclosures, giving each a dispatch number, recording it in the Dispatch Book (Outgoing Mail Register) and sending it by messenger or post.
4. Name the two types of circulars.
Direct Circular and Step-wise Circular.
5. What is a Mandatory Order?
A Mandatory Order is a direct, authoritative written command issued by the Office Chief or head of department, either as a standalone order or written on the margin of an incoming letter, instructing a subordinate section to carry out a specific action immediately.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Explain any six essential qualities of a good letter.
A letter can achieve its purpose only if it has certain qualities. Six of them are:
- Simplicity: The letter is written in clear, everyday language rather than pompous or old-fashioned jargon, so any reader can follow it.
- Clarity: The wording is unambiguous, so the reader understands the exact message on the first reading without confusion.
- Correctness (accuracy): The letter is free from grammatical, spelling, punctuation and factual errors, especially in dates, reference numbers and amounts of money.
- Completeness: It contains all the necessary particulars, such as item specifications, quantities, prices, delivery dates and payment terms, so that no follow-up letter is needed to clarify it.
- Conciseness (brevity): It gives the complete message in as few words as possible, without unnecessary repetition, respecting the reader’s time.
- Courtesy (politeness): It keeps a respectful, positive and polite tone, even when it is a complaint or a demand for overdue payment.
The other two qualities listed in the unit are originality and attractiveness (a balanced layout with clean margins and neat typing) and sincerity and persuasiveness (convincing the reader of the writer’s genuine intent and prompting timely action).
2. Draw neat specimen formats of an Entry Book and a Dispatch Book showing all columns.
(a) Specimen of Entry Book (Incoming Mail Register): Every letter received is given the next serial Entry No., recorded on the day of receipt and forwarded to the section that will act on it.
| Entry No. | Date of Entry | Received Letter’s Ref. No. | Received Letter’s Date | Name of Sending Office/Person | Subject | Section / Officer Forwarded To | Signature & Date | Remarks |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 301 | 2082-04-10 | 082/83-27 | 2082-04-08 | Education Development and Coordination Unit, Kathmandu | Teacher Training Schedule | Admin Section | Signed (04/10) | Urgent |
| 302 | 2082-04-11 | 082/83-96 | 2082-04-09 | Himalayan Books & Stationery Pvt. Ltd., Putalisadak | Quotation for Stationery | Procurement Section | Signed (04/11) | Price list encl. |
| 303 | 2082-04-11 | – | 2082-04-10 | Hari Prasad Koirala (Guardian), Jorpati | Request for Fee Concession | Accounts Section | Signed (04/11) | Personal application |
(b) Specimen of Dispatch Book (Outgoing Mail Register): Every signed letter sent out is given the next serial Dispatch No., recorded with its mode of dispatch, and signed for by the messenger or receiver.
| Dispatch No. | Date of Dispatch | Letter Date | Name & Address of Receiving Office | Subject | Sending Section | Mode of Dispatch / Postage | Messenger/Receiver Signature | Remarks |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 145 | 2082-04-12 | 2082-04-12 | Himalayan Books & Stationery Pvt. Ltd., Putalisadak, Kathmandu | Order for Stationery | Procurement Section | Registered Post (Rs. 25) | Receipt #518 | Order list encl. |
| 146 | 2082-04-13 | 2082-04-13 | Education Development and Coordination Unit, Kathmandu | List of Teachers for Training | Admin Section | By Hand (Messenger Book) | Signed | Encl. 2 pages |
| 147 | 2082-04-13 | 2082-04-12 | Hari Prasad Koirala, Jorpati, Kathmandu | Decision on Fee Concession | Accounts Section | By Hand (Messenger Book) | Signed | – |
3. Differentiate between a Circular and a Notice.
| Basis | Circular | Notice |
|---|---|---|
| Meaning | An official letter containing the same policy, instruction or guideline, sent at the same time by a central or head office to many subordinate branches or departments | A formal written announcement that informs employees, shareholders or the general public about an upcoming event, holiday, tender or rule |
| Receivers | Specific subordinate branches, departments or offices of the same organization | Anyone concerned: employees, shareholders or the general public |
| Mode of communication | Sent as a letter to each receiving office by post, messenger or email | Displayed on a notice board, published in newspapers or posted online |
| Purpose | To pass on instructions or guidelines that the receiving offices must follow | To inform people about an event, decision or opportunity |
| Types | Direct Circular and Step-wise Circular | General, Financial/Tender, Meeting, Public/Government, Commercial and Condolence notices |
| Examples | A Ministry of Finance circular sent to all District Treasury Comptroller Offices | A school notice announcing the Dashain holidays; a tender notice in a newspaper |
C. Long Practical / Drafting Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. Describe the eight structural parts of a standard business letter with a neat layout diagram.
A standard official or business letter has eight structural parts arranged in a fixed, logical order. Because each part has its own place on the page, the reader can find the sender, the date, the purpose and the signature at a glance. The eight parts are:
- Heading (Letterhead), Ref. No. and Date: The letterhead at the top centre gives the name, address, phone number and email of the sending office. The reference number on the top left (for example, Ref. No.: 082/83-42) identifies the letter in the sender’s Dispatch Book, and the date on the top right (for example, 2082-04-15) shows when the letter was written.
- Inside Address: The name or designation and the full address of the receiver, written on the left below the Ref. No. It makes sure the letter reaches the right person and shows on the office copy who it was sent to.
- Subject Line: A brief one-line summary of the letter’s purpose, centred below the inside address. It helps the receiving office register the letter and forward it to the right section quickly.
- Salutation: A respectful greeting at the left margin below the subject, such as Dear Sir / Madam, or Respected Sir,.
- Body of the Letter: The main text, divided into three paragraphs: (a) opening, which gives the reference or context; (b) main message, which gives the details, figures or a table; and (c) closing, which states the action requested from the reader.
- Complimentary Close: A polite closing phrase on the right or left below the body that matches the salutation, such as Yours faithfully, or Yours sincerely,.
- Signature, Name and Designation: The writer’s handwritten signature above the typed name and designation, with the office seal. It shows that the letter is authorized and who is responsible for it.
- Enclosures and Copy To (C.C.): At the bottom left, Encl. lists the documents attached to the letter, and C.C. lists the offices or persons who receive a copy. The receiver’s name and address are also written on the envelope as the superscription.
Layout diagram (the part numbers and positions are shown in square brackets):
[Part 1: Heading, letterhead at the top centre]
HIMALAYAN BOOKS & STATIONERY PVT. LTD.
Putalisadak, Kathmandu, Nepal
Phone: 01-42XXXXX | Email: [email protected][Part 1 (contd.): Ref. No. on the left, Date on the right]
Ref. No.: 082/83-42
Date: 2082-04-15[Part 2: Inside Address, left side]
The Sales Manager,
Janak Education Materials Centre Ltd.,
Sanothimi, Bhaktapur.[Part 3: Subject Line, centred]
Subject: Quotation for Grade 9 Accounting Textbooks[Part 4: Salutation, left margin]
Dear Sir,[Part 5: Body in three paragraphs: (a) opening, (b) main message, (c) closing]
We are a bookseller and stationery supplier in Putalisadak, and we supply textbooks to more than forty schools in the Kathmandu Valley.We would like to buy 500 copies of the Grade 9 Accounting textbook (2082 edition) for the coming academic session. Please send us your quotation stating the unit price, the trade discount you allow, delivery charges up to our shop and your terms of payment.
We would be grateful to receive your quotation by 2082-04-25, so that we can place our order before the new session begins.
[Part 6: Complimentary Close]
Yours faithfully,[Part 7: Signature, Name and Designation, with office seal]
(Signed)
Ramesh Adhikari
Procurement Officer[Part 8: Enclosures and Copy To, bottom left]
Encl.: 1. List of Required Titles
C.C.: Accounts Section
Conclusion: The eight parts give every letter a standard shape. The heading and date identify the sender and time, the inside address and subject direct the letter to the right reader and section, the body carries the message, and the close, signature and enclosures make it authentic and complete. A letter arranged in this order is easy to read, register, file and produce later as evidence.
2. Draft an imaginary Order Letter on behalf of Bagmati High School, Gokarneshwor, Kathmandu to Janak Education Materials Centre, Bhaktapur, ordering 100 copies each of Grade 9 Accounting, Mathematics, and Science textbooks.
An order letter is written after the buyer has accepted the supplier’s quotation. A model draft, laid out like Model Specimen 1:
BAGMATI HIGH SCHOOL
Gokarneshwor-6, Jorpati, Kathmandu, Nepal
Phone: 01-49XXXXX | Email: [email protected]Ref. No.: 082/83-57
Date: 2082-01-12The Sales Manager,
Janak Education Materials Centre Ltd.,
Sanothimi, Bhaktapur.Subject: Order for Grade 9 Textbooks
Dear Sir,
We thank you for your quotation letter Ref. No. JEMC/082/31 dated 2082-01-05 in reply to our inquiry. We are satisfied with your prices, the 10% trade discount and your offer of free delivery to our school. Please supply the following textbooks for the new academic session:
S.N. Title of the Book Grade Edition Quantity (Copies) Unit Price (Rs.) Amount (Rs.) 1. Accounting Grade 9 2082 Edition 100 210 21,000 2. Mathematics Grade 9 2082 Edition 100 245 24,500 3. Science Grade 9 2082 Edition 100 280 28,000 Total 300 73,500 Less: 10% Trade Discount 7,350 Net Amount Payable 66,150 We have enclosed an A/C Payee Cheque No. 0078214 drawn on Rastriya Banijya Bank Ltd., Jorpati Branch, for Rs. 30,000 (Rupees Thirty Thousand only) as an advance payment. The balance of Rs. 36,150 will be paid within 15 days of receiving the books and your tax invoice. As our classes begin soon, please deliver the books by 2082-01-25, packed securely in waterproof bundles labelled by subject.
Yours faithfully,
(Signed)
Gita Maharjan
Principal
Encl.: Rastriya Banijya Bank Ltd. Cheque No. 0078214 for Rs. 30,000.
C.C.: Accounts Section, Bagmati High School
3. Draft a job Application Letter with a complete Curriculum Vitae (Bio-data) applying for the vacant post of Accountant at Nepal Telecom, Central Office, Bhadrakali, Kathmandu.
An application letter introduces the applicant and asks for the post; the CV gives the full details. A model draft, laid out like Model Specimen 2:
(a) Application Letter
Kirtipur-4, Kathmandu
Date: 2082-06-10The Chief, Human Resource Department,
Nepal Telecom, Central Office,
Bhadrakali, Kathmandu.Subject: Application for the Post of Accountant
Respected Sir/Madam,
With reference to your vacancy notice published in the Gorkhapatra daily on 2082-06-03 for the post of Accountant, I wish to offer my candidacy for the same.I have completed the Bachelor of Business Studies (BBS) from Tribhuvan University in First Division, with Accountancy and Finance as my main subjects. Before that, I passed the Secondary Education Examination (SEE) and Higher Secondary (+2) in Management. I have also completed a three-month training course in Computerized Accounting (Tally Prime, MS Excel, and online VAT and TDS filing).
For the past two years, I have been working as an Accounts Assistant at Sagarmatha Traders Pvt. Ltd., Kalimati, where I prepare journal vouchers, post the ledger, maintain the cash book, reconcile bank statements, and prepare monthly VAT and TDS returns. I believe this experience has prepared me well for the duties of an Accountant in a large public company such as Nepal Telecom.
I have enclosed my detailed Curriculum Vitae (Bio-data) and copies of my certificates for your kind consideration. If given an opportunity to serve in your esteemed organization, I assure you that I will discharge my duties with honesty, accuracy, and dedication.
Yours faithfully,
(Signed)
Sabina Karki
Contact: 9841XXXXXX
Encl.: 1. Curriculum Vitae (CV) | 2. Academic & Training Certificates | 3. Experience Letter | 4. Citizenship Copy | 5. Two Passport-size Photographs
(b) Curriculum Vitae (Bio-data)
CURRICULUM VITAE (BIO-DATA)
1. Personal Details
Particulars Details Full Name Sabina Karki Father’s Name Hari Bahadur Karki Date of Birth 2058-04-18 B.S. Gender Female Marital Status Unmarried Nationality Nepali Citizenship Certificate No. XX-XX-XX-XXXXX (issued by District Administration Office, Dolakha) Permanent Address Bhimeshwor-3, Charikot, Dolakha Temporary Address Kirtipur-4, Kathmandu Mobile 9841XXXXXX [email protected] 2. Career Objective
To work as an Accountant in a reputed organization where I can use my knowledge of accounting, taxation and computer applications, and grow professionally while contributing to the organization’s goals.3. Academic Qualifications
S.N. Examination / Degree Institution Year Passed (B.S.) Result 1. Bachelor of Business Studies (BBS), Tribhuvan University Nepal Commerce Campus, Minbhawan, Kathmandu 2081 First Division (66.8%) 2. Higher Secondary (+2), Management Shree Jana Jyoti Secondary School, Charikot, Dolakha 2076 GPA 3.41 3. Secondary Education Examination (SEE) Shree Jana Jyoti Secondary School, Charikot, Dolakha 2074 GPA 3.60 4. Training
S.N. Training Institute Duration Year (B.S.) 1. Computerized Accounting (Tally Prime, MS Excel, online VAT and TDS filing) Kathmandu Accounting Training Centre, Bagbazar 3 months 2079 2. Basic Computer Course (MS Office, Nepali Unicode typing, internet and email) Charikot Computer Institute, Dolakha 3 months 2075 5. Work Experience
Post Organization Period Main Duties Accounts Assistant Sagarmatha Traders Pvt. Ltd., Kalimati, Kathmandu 2080-01-01 to date (about 2 years 5 months) Preparing journal vouchers, posting the ledger, maintaining the cash book, bank reconciliation, monthly VAT and TDS returns, salary sheets 6. Computer Skills
MS Word, MS Excel (formulas and pivot tables), MS PowerPoint, Tally Prime, Busy accounting software, Nepali Unicode typing, email and internet.7. Language Skills
Nepali (mother tongue), English (fluent in reading, writing and speaking), Hindi (speaking).8. Personal Qualities and Interests
Honest, punctual, hard-working and good at teamwork. Interests: reading, volunteering with the local youth club and playing table tennis.9. References
- Mr. Krishna Prasad Poudel, Lecturer, Nepal Commerce Campus, Minbhawan, Kathmandu. Mobile: 9851XXXXXX
- Mrs. Sunita Maharjan, Finance Manager, Sagarmatha Traders Pvt. Ltd., Kalimati, Kathmandu. Mobile: 9841XXXXXX
10. Declaration
I hereby declare that all the information given above is true and correct to the best of my knowledge.(Signed)
Sabina Karki
Date: 2082-06-10
Unit 5 Solutions: Record Keeping & Management
Answers to the Unit 5 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Define a record in one sentence.
A record is any written or digital document, such as a letter, invoice, voucher, contract or set of minutes, that is preserved for future reference and evidence.
2. Which regulation governs the disposal of records in government offices of Nepal?
The Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S. governs the classification and disposal of records in the government offices of Nepal.
3. What is the retention period of Important Records and Useful Records?
Important Records are kept for 5 to 10 years (until the final audit and legal settlement are completed), and Useful Records are kept for 1 to 5 years from the date of creation.
4. Give two examples of Very Important (Permanent) Records.
International treaties and land ownership Title Deeds (others include national border maps, acts and regulations, and court judgments).
5. Give two examples of Useless Records.
Festival greeting cards (New Year or holiday wishes) and wedding or ceremony invitations (others include routine acknowledgments and rough drafts).
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. What is record management? Explain its four main objectives.
Record management is the complete administrative control over the whole lifecycle of records, from their creation or receipt, classification, storage, maintenance and retrieval to their final retention or legal disposal. According to S.P. Arora, “Record management in its broadest sense concerns itself with records creation, distribution, maintenance, retention, preservation, retrieval, and disposal.”
Its four main objectives are:
- Preserving institutional memory (historical function): Record management keeps an orderly account of the organization’s past transactions, decisions and progress, so that the office does not depend on the memory of individual employees.
- Ascertaining the true financial condition: Verified vouchers and books of account allow accountants to prepare accurate financial statements, such as the Trial Balance, Profit & Loss Account and Balance Sheet.
- Basis for future planning and budgeting: Reliable historical data on sales, costs and expenditure is needed to forecast future budgets and business strategies.
- Fulfilling legal and audit requirements: Properly kept records serve as indisputable documentary proof in courts of law, tax assessments and statutory audits.
The unit lists two more objectives: inter-period and inter-firm comparison (analytical function) and detecting errors, frauds and wastes (control function).
2. Explain any four principles of record management.
Record management works well only when it follows certain principles. Four of its five core principles are:
- Principle of Purpose: Every record preserved must have a clear administrative, financial or legal purpose. Keeping records with no purpose wastes money, filing space and clerical time.
- Principle of Classification: Records must be grouped logically, by subject, alphabet, number, geography or chronology, through proper filing and indexing, so that they do not become a heap of confusion.
- Principle of Verification: Every recorded fact must be supported by authentic source vouchers, signatures and stamps, so that it can be verified during audits or legal disputes.
- Principle of Availability (prompt retrieval): Records must be stored in such a way that any required document can be located and retrieved in the shortest possible time.
The fifth principle is economy and safety: the cost of keeping records should be reasonable, and vital documents must be protected against fire, moisture, pests and cyber threats.
3. Describe the stages of the Record Management Cycle.
Every record passes through five stages during its life, together called the Record Management Cycle:
- Creation / Receipt: The record comes into existence when the office generates an internal document (a voucher, report or letter) or receives an external one.
- Classification and Filing: The record is registered in the Entry Book, indexed and placed in the appropriate file folder or digital directory.
- Active Use and Maintenance: The record is taken out for daily reference, accounting or decision making, and returned safely to its file after use.
- Inactive Storage / Archiving: Older records that are rarely needed are moved from active office desks to a central record room or archive.
- Retention or Legal Disposal: Permanent records are preserved indefinitely, while records whose retention period has expired are shredded or burned under the supervision of an official committee, as provided in the Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. What is meant by disposal of records? Explain the four types of records based on their utility and retention period under the Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S.
Meaning of disposal of records: Disposal of records is the final stage of the record management cycle, in which records whose retention period has expired are destroyed, usually by shredding or burning, under the supervision of an official committee, while records of lasting value are kept permanently. Not all records have the same lifespan. Keeping expired, useless papers forever wastes expensive office space, filing cabinets and clerical time, and makes important records harder to find. Planned disposal therefore:
- Saves space and cost: Filing cabinets and record rooms are freed for current records.
- Speeds up retrieval: With fewer unwanted papers, needed records can be found quickly.
- Protects confidentiality: Destroying records properly, under supervision, prevents old official papers from being misused.
In the government offices of Nepal, records are classified and disposed of according to the Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S. into four categories:
- Very Important Records (Permanent Records): These are documents of permanent national, legal or constitutional value. They are preserved forever. Examples: international treaties, national border maps, acts and regulations, land ownership Title Deeds, a company’s memorandum and articles of association, court judgments, and peace and security agreements. Because they can never be replaced, they must be kept safe from fire, moisture and pests.
- Important Records: These are documents relating to financial administration, contracts and audits. They are kept for 5 to 10 years, until the final audit and legal settlement are completed. Examples: tax invoices, purchase and sales ledgers, cash books, annual financial statements, audit reports, construction tender contracts and loan agreements.
- Useful Records: These are documents of temporary administrative use. They are kept for 1 to 5 years from the date of creation. Examples: ordinary inter-office correspondence, routine bank statements, leave applications, circular letters, and annual budget estimates after the final audit.
- Useless Records (Routine Records): These are documents that lose their use as soon as their message has been communicated. They are destroyed immediately after reading or action, or within 1 year. Examples: festival greeting cards (New Year or holiday wishes), wedding and ceremony invitations, condolence messages, routine acknowledgments and rough drafts.
| Category of Record | Retention Period | Examples |
|---|---|---|
| Very Important (Permanent) | Forever (permanent) | Treaties, border maps, acts, Title Deeds, court judgments |
| Important | 5 to 10 years | Tax invoices, ledgers, cash books, audit reports, contracts |
| Useful | 1 to 5 years | Ordinary correspondence, bank statements, leave applications |
| Useless (Routine) | Destroyed after use or within 1 year | Greeting cards, invitations, rough drafts |
Conclusion: Disposal is as much a part of record management as preservation. By classifying records into Very Important, Important, Useful and Useless categories under the Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S., an office keeps what it must keep for law, audit and history, and safely destroys the rest, saving space, cost and time.
Unit 6 Solutions: Postal & Electronic Communication
Answers to the Unit 6 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. When was the General Post Office established in Nepal, and when were the first postage stamps issued?
The General Post Office was established in Kathmandu in 1935 B.S. (1878 A.D.), and the first Nepali postage stamps were issued in 1938 B.S. (1881 A.D.).
2. On what date did Nepal become a member of the Universal Postal Union (UPU)?
Nepal became a full member of the Universal Postal Union on 11 October 1956 A.D.
3. Why are enclosures not allowed inside an Aerogramme?
An aerogramme is a light, pre-stamped sheet that folds into its own envelope and is sold at a fixed low airmail rate for the message written on it, so photos, extra paper or cheques would add weight and contents it has not paid for; if anything is enclosed, double postage is charged.
4. Why is a Book Post envelope left unsealed?
A Book Post envelope is left unsealed (closed only with a flap or string) so that postal staff can inspect it and make sure no personal letter is hidden inside, because book post is charged at a concessional rate lower than that of sealed letters.
5. Write the full form of EMS and ICT.
EMS: Express Mail Service. ICT: Information and Communication Technology.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Explain the importance of postal service to the government, business firms, and individuals.
The postal service is the oldest, most widespread and most affordable government network for carrying letters, parcels and money orders. Its importance to each group is:
- For the government: The post office carries government acts, official gazettes, circulars, election materials and official letters from the federal ministries in Kathmandu to provincial, district and rural local offices. In this way, government orders reach every level of administration. The sale of postage stamps also earns non-tax revenue for the government.
- For business firms: Traders use the post to send commercial inquiries, quotations, invoices, product samples, book posts and parcels to customers in remote markets where other services may not reach. Registered post gives them proof of posting for important documents, and money orders let them send or receive small remittances.
- For individuals: The post is an affordable medium for citizens in every corner of the country. Through it, people receive citizenship documents, passports, university transcripts, appointment letters and personal parcels at low cost, and can send letters to relatives at home and abroad.
2. State five differences between an Ordinary Letter and a Registered Letter.
| Basis | Ordinary Letter | Registered Letter |
|---|---|---|
| Nature of message | Simple, routine and non-urgent messages | Important, urgent, legal and confidential documents |
| Recording at the post office | Not recorded individually; dropped directly into the letterbox | Handed over at the postal counter and recorded in the post office register |
| Postage cost | Economical; needs only the minimum basic postage stamp | Costlier; needs an additional registration fee on top of normal postage |
| Proof of posting | No receipt is issued to the sender | An official receipt is issued as legal proof of posting |
| Responsibility | The post office bears no liability if the letter is lost or damaged in transit | The post office tracks the letter and is responsible for its safe delivery |
| Delivery | Delivered to the address without taking any signature | Delivered only against the addressee’s signature; an Acknowledgment Due (A.D.) card can be returned to the sender |
| Examples | Greetings, personal letters and routine official letters | Cheques, bank drafts, legal notices, land deeds and appointment letters |
3. What is electronic communication service? Explain the role of Email, Internet Websites, and Video Conferencing in a modern office.
Electronic communication service is the instant transfer of text, audio, images, video and accounting files across the world through digital networks such as the internet, using Information and Communication Technology (ICT). It has changed the way modern offices work because messages that once took days by post now arrive in seconds.
Role in a modern office:
- Email (Electronic Mail): Email sends digital messages over the internet to one or many recipients at the same time, almost instantly and at virtually no extra cost. Offices attach PDF invoices, spreadsheets and scanned documents to emails, and the sent and received mails remain as a record that can be searched later.
- Internet websites: Through the World Wide Web, an office publishes official notices, annual reports, e-bidding tenders and online customer portals on its own website, as the Curriculum Development Centre and the Inland Revenue Department do. The public can read notices, download forms and use services at any time without visiting the office.
- Video conferencing: Tools such as Zoom, Google Meet and Microsoft Teams let executives, branch managers and clients in different districts or countries hold face-to-face meetings online, share their screens and take decisions without travel expenses or delay.
Together, these tools give an office speed, economy and global reach. Other electronic means used in offices are social media and fax.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. Trace the historical development of postal service in Nepal and explain the different methods of sending letters and parcels through the post office.
Postal service is the oldest, most widespread and most affordable government-operated network for collecting, sorting, transporting and delivering letters, postcards, printed books, parcels and money orders across the country and around the world. In Nepal, it grew from royal foot runners into a national network linked with the whole world.
Historical development of postal service in Nepal:
- Ancient and medieval era: Royal messengers and foot runners carried official state decrees across hill trails. There was no postal service for the general public.
- General Post Office, 1935 B.S. (1878 A.D.): The General Post Office (Central Post Office) was established in Kathmandu during the reign of King Surendra, when Ranodip Singh was Prime Minister. Postal service was opened to the public for the first time, and 43 post offices were set up across Nepal within three years.
- First postage stamps, 1938 B.S. (1881 A.D.): The first Nepali postage stamps of small denominations were introduced, replacing cash payment for postage.
- Expansion after democracy, 2007 B.S. (1951 A.D.): When democracy arrived, 124 post offices were operating. Under the Five-Year Development Plans, the network grew to nearly 4,000 post offices, made up of the General Post Office and Regional, District, Area and Additional Post Offices.
- Membership of the UPU, 11 October 1956: Nepal became a full member of the Universal Postal Union, which connected its domestic postal network directly with international mail routes.
- International agreements, 2031 and 2039 B.S.: Nepal signed the UPU Parcel Post Agreement in 2031 B.S. (1974 A.D.), which made international parcel delivery possible, and joined the Asian-Pacific Postal Union (APPU) in 2039 B.S. (1982 A.D.).
- Modern services, 2049 B.S. (1992 A.D.) to 2061 B.S. (2004 A.D.): In this period the National Communication Policy, 1992 was adopted, services such as Express Mail Service (EMS), the Postal Saving Bank, money orders and tele-centres were developed, and the Postal Payment Service Agreement (2004) was signed.
Methods of sending letters and parcels through the post office:
- Ordinary letter: Used for routine, non-confidential personal or official messages. It needs only the minimum postage stamp and is dropped into the letterbox; no receipt is issued, and the post office is not liable if it is lost.
- Registered letter: Used for urgent, confidential or legally important documents such as cheques, bank drafts, legal notices, land deeds and appointment letters. The sender pays an extra registration charge, the envelope is stamped “Registered Post”, a receipt is issued, and the letter is delivered against the addressee’s signature, with an optional Acknowledgment Due (A.D.) card returned to the sender.
- Post card: The cheapest open card, issued by the post office with a postage stamp already printed on one side. Since it has no envelope and anyone can read it, it suits only short, non-confidential messages.
- Aerogramme: A light, pre-stamped sheet for airmail that is folded and gummed on three sides to form its own envelope. Nothing may be enclosed in it; an enclosure attracts double postage.
- Book post: Used for printed books, magazines, newspapers, examination forms and invitation cards at a concessional rate lower than that of sealed letters. The cover is marked “Book Post” and left unsealed so that postal staff can check that no personal letter is hidden inside.
- Parcel post: Used for goods, gifts, product samples and heavy packets within Nepal or abroad. Parcels are packed securely in cloth or cardboard boxes, sealed, and charged according to weight and distance.
Besides these six traditional methods, Nepal Post runs the Express Mail Service (EMS), a fast courier service with tracking numbers and time-bound delivery that carries urgent documents and goods to major cities in Nepal and over 40 foreign countries.
Conclusion: Nepal’s postal service has grown from royal foot runners into a network of nearly 4,000 post offices linked to the world through the UPU. By choosing the right method for each item (ordinary or registered letter, post card, aerogramme, book post, parcel post or EMS), an office can send it at the lowest cost and with the safety and speed it needs.
Unit 7 Solutions: Business — Concept, Evolution & Types
Answers to the Unit 7 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Define business in one sentence.
Business is any lawful, regular human economic activity of producing, buying and selling goods and services with the main objective of earning profit through customer satisfaction.
2. What is meant by Entrepôt Trade?
Entrepôt (re-export) trade is importing goods from one country, not for use at home, but to process or re-pack them and export them to a third country, as trading hubs such as Singapore and Dubai do.
3. Write the equation connecting Commerce, Trade, and Auxiliaries to Trade.
Commerce = Trade + Auxiliaries to Trade
4. Which hindrance of trade is removed by (a) Warehousing and (b) Insurance?
(a) Warehousing removes the hindrance of time, and (b) insurance removes the hindrance of risk.
5. Write the full form of PAN and VAT, and state the standard rate of VAT in Nepal.
PAN stands for Permanent Account Number and VAT for Value Added Tax; the standard rate of VAT in Nepal is 13%.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Explain any five essential characteristics of business.
- Human economic activity: Business is carried out by human beings to earn a livelihood and create wealth. Cooking food for one’s own family is not business, but cooking and selling food in a restaurant is. Charity and hobbies are not business either.
- Production and exchange of goods and services: Business involves either producing goods (industry) or buying and selling goods and services for value (commerce). Producing something only for one’s own use is not business.
- Regularity and continuity in dealings: A single, isolated transaction, such as selling one’s own old motorcycle, is not business. Buying and selling motorcycles regularly in a showroom is.
- Profit motive: The main driving force of every business is profit, the surplus of revenue over cost. Profit is needed for the business to survive and grow.
- Risk and uncertainty: Every business faces changes in customer taste, price fluctuations, competition, natural disasters and fire, so a loss is always possible.
The other two characteristics are creation of utilities and customer satisfaction (form, place and time utility) and legality (smuggling, black-marketing and gambling are not business).
2. Differentiate between Industry, Commerce, and Trade.
Industry and commerce are the two branches of business, and trade is a part of commerce.
| Basis | Industry | Commerce | Trade |
|---|---|---|---|
| Meaning | Extraction, reproduction, conversion, processing and construction of goods | All activities that carry goods from the place of production to the final consumers by removing hindrances | Actual buying and selling of goods and services for money or money’s worth |
| Main function | Production of goods and services | Distribution of goods and services | Exchange of goods (transfer of ownership from seller to buyer) |
| Utility created | Form utility | Place, time and possession utility | Possession (ownership) utility |
| Hindrance removed | Does not remove hindrances; it produces the goods | Hindrances of person, place, time, finance, risk and information | Hindrance of person, by bringing buyers and sellers together |
| Scope | Primary, secondary and tertiary (service) industry | Wider than trade: Trade + Auxiliaries to Trade | Narrowest: home trade and foreign trade only |
| Examples | Poultry farming, mining, a cement factory, road construction | Ilam tea carried by truck, stored, insured, advertised and sold in Kathmandu | A retailer buying tea from a wholesaler and selling it to consumers |
3. Distinguish between Home Trade and Foreign Trade on any four bases.
| Basis | Home (Internal) Trade | Foreign (International) Trade |
|---|---|---|
| Meaning | Buying and selling of goods within the boundaries of the same country, e.g., tea produced in Ilam sold in Kathmandu or Pokhara | Buying and selling of goods and services across national borders, e.g., Nepal importing petroleum from India or exporting carpets and pashmina |
| Currency | Settled in domestic currency (Nepalese rupees) | Involves foreign currency and its exchange |
| Customs duties | No customs duties or border formalities | Customs duties and customs formalities at the border |
| Payment method | Simple payment by cash, cheque or bank transfer | Letters of Credit (L/C) are commonly used |
| Types | Wholesale trade and retail trade | Import trade, export trade and entrepôt (re-export) trade |
| Risk and cost | Lower, as distances are shorter and the same laws apply | Higher, because of long distances, different laws and changes in exchange rates |
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. What is meant by Auxiliaries to Trade? Explain how transportation, warehousing, banking, insurance, and advertising help in the smooth operation of commerce.
Auxiliaries (aids) to trade are the activities that help trade run smoothly by removing specific hindrances between producers and consumers. They do not buy or sell goods themselves, but without them goods would stay where and when they are produced. Together with trade, they make up commerce: Commerce = Trade + Auxiliaries to Trade. Each auxiliary helps commerce as follows:
- Transportation (removes the hindrance of place): Goods are produced in one place but consumed in many places. Transport carries raw materials to factories and finished goods to distant markets, for example trucks bringing tea from Ilam to Kathmandu. It creates place utility and widens the market for every product.
- Warehousing (removes the hindrance of time): Many goods are produced in one season but demanded all year, or produced now but needed later. Warehouses store seasonal products such as paddy, potatoes and woolen garments safely until consumer demand arises. This creates time utility and keeps supply and prices steady.
- Banking and finance (removes the hindrance of finance and payment): Traders need money to buy stock and pay suppliers before they sell. Banks provide working capital loans and overdrafts, and make payment easy through cheques and remittances. In foreign trade, a Letter of Credit (L/C) gives the exporter an assurance of payment.
- Insurance (removes the hindrance of risk): Goods may be destroyed by fire, transit accidents, theft or natural calamities. In exchange for a periodic premium, an insurance company compensates the trader for such losses, so traders can carry on business without fear of losing everything.
- Advertising (removes the hindrance of information or knowledge): Consumers cannot buy a product they do not know about. Advertising informs them about its availability, features, price and uses, creates demand for new products and helps traders sell more.
- Communication (removes the hindrance of information in dealings): The unit pairs communication with advertising. Post, telephone, email and the internet let buyers and sellers send inquiries, orders and quotations and negotiate deals instantly, even when they are far apart.
Conclusion: Trade alone cannot carry goods from producers to consumers. Transport, warehousing, banking, insurance and advertising remove the hindrances of place, time, finance, risk and information, so goods reach the right consumer at the right place and time. That is why they are called aids to trade and are an essential part of commerce.
Unit 8 Solutions: Forms of Business Organization
Answers to the Unit 8 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. What is meant by unlimited liability in a Sole Trading Concern?
Unlimited liability means that the sole proprietor is personally responsible for all the debts of the business, so if the business assets are not enough to pay the creditors, the proprietor’s personal property, such as a house and land, can be sold to pay them.
2. What is a Partnership Deed?
A Partnership Deed is the written agreement signed by the partners that sets out the terms of their partnership, such as the capital contributed by each partner, the ratio for sharing profits and losses, and the rights and duties of the partners.
3. State the minimum and maximum number of shareholders in a Private Limited Company and a Public Limited Company in Nepal.
A Private Limited Company must have a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 101 shareholders, while a Public Limited Company must have a minimum of 7 shareholders and has no maximum limit.
4. Why is a Joint Stock Company called an artificial person created by law?
A company is created by law (incorporated under the Companies Act, 2063 B.S.) and has a separate legal entity, so it can own property, make contracts, and sue and be sued in its own name like a person, but it has no physical body and acts through its directors and common seal.
5. Give two examples each of Public Enterprises and Multinational Companies operating in Nepal.
Public Enterprises: Nepal Electricity Authority (NEA) and Nepal Oil Corporation (NOC). Multinational Companies: Unilever Nepal Ltd. and Dabur Nepal Pvt. Ltd.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Explain four advantages and four disadvantages of a Sole Trading Concern.
Advantages:
- Easy and inexpensive formation and dissolution: A sole trading concern needs few legal formalities. It is registered with the Department of Commerce, Supplies and Consumer Protection, the Department of Cottage and Small Industries or the local ward or municipal office, and can be closed just as easily.
- Quick decision-making: The owner does not have to consult anyone, so decisions are taken quickly and business opportunities are not missed.
- Complete secrecy: The owner can keep the business accounts, formulas and plans completely secret from competitors.
- Strong personal incentive: Since 100% of the profit belongs to the proprietor, the owner works hard and runs the business efficiently.
A fifth advantage is direct personal contact with customers, which helps the owner understand and satisfy their needs.
Disadvantages:
- Unlimited liability: If business assets are not enough to pay the creditors, the proprietor’s personal house and land can be sold to pay business debts.
- Limited capital: Capital is limited to the owner’s own savings and the small amount he or she can borrow, so the business cannot grow large.
- Limited managerial skill: One person cannot be an expert in buying, selling, accounting and management at the same time.
- Uncertain continuity: The illness, insolvency or death of the owner may close the business.
2. Differentiate between a Sole Trading Concern and a Partnership Firm.
| Basis | Sole Trading Concern | Partnership Firm |
|---|---|---|
| Number of owners | Owned by one single individual (the sole proprietor) | Owned by two or more partners |
| Governing Act in Nepal | Private Firm Registration Act, 2014 B.S. | Partnership Act, 2020 B.S. |
| Agreement | No agreement is needed | Based on a written agreement called the Partnership Deed |
| Capital and skills | Limited to the capital and ability of one person | Larger, as partners pool their capital, labour and skill |
| Profit and loss | All profit goes to the owner, who also bears all losses alone | Profits and losses are shared among the partners in the agreed ratio |
| Decision-making and secrecy | Quick decisions; complete secrecy | Slower, as partners must consult one another; less secrecy and a risk of disputes |
Both have unlimited liability: the sole trader alone, and the partners jointly and severally.
3. What is a Cooperative Society? Explain any four features of a cooperative organization in Nepal.
A Cooperative Society is a voluntary, democratic and autonomous association of people, especially small farmers, artisans, workers and middle-income citizens, who unite on the principle of equality and mutual self-help to promote their common economic, social and cultural interests without exploitation by middlemen. In Nepal, cooperatives are regulated under the Cooperative Act, 2074 B.S.
Features of a cooperative organization:
- Voluntary and open membership: People who share a common economic bond can join the society of their own free will and can leave it when they wish. No one is forced to become a member. Under the Cooperative Act, 2074 B.S., at least 30 members are needed to form a cooperative.
- Democratic control (one member, one vote): Every member has only one vote, however many shares he or she holds. The members elect their own committee to manage the society.
- Service motive and mutual self-help: The main aim is service to members, not profit, under the motto “Each for all and all for each.” For example, a milk producers’ cooperative collects and sells its members’ milk directly, so they are not exploited by middlemen.
- Limited liability and separate legal entity: A cooperative registered under the Cooperative Act, 2074 B.S. has a separate legal entity, and each member’s liability is limited to the shares he or she holds.
Other features come from the seven Rochdale principles, such as autonomy, education and training, cooperation among cooperatives and concern for community.
4. Define a Multinational Company (MNC) and state four characteristics of MNCs.
A Multinational Company (MNC), also called a Transnational Corporation, is a giant corporate enterprise that has its registered headquarters in one country (the home country) and operates production plants, assembly units or marketing subsidiaries in two or more other countries (the host countries). Examples in Nepal are Unilever Nepal Ltd., Dabur Nepal Pvt. Ltd. and Standard Chartered Bank Nepal.
Characteristics of MNCs:
- Massive capital and financial strength: MNCs have huge financial resources and bring Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) into host countries such as Nepal.
- Advanced technology and Research & Development (R&D): They spend heavily on research and transfer modern technology and production methods to the countries where they operate.
- Global brand recognition: Their brands, such as Coca-Cola and Unilever, are known and trusted by customers in many countries.
- Professional management: They are run by trained, professional managers who follow modern management practices, while the headquarters keeps overall control of all branches.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. Define a Joint Stock Company. Explain its main characteristics and differentiate between a Private Limited Company and a Public Limited Company on any six bases.
A Joint Stock Company is a voluntary association of individuals formed for profit, with a separate legal entity, perpetual succession, a common seal, and capital divided into transferable units called shares. According to Prof. L.H. Haney, “A company is an artificial person created by law, having separate entity with a perpetual succession and a common seal.” In Nepal, companies are incorporated at the Office of the Company Registrar under the Companies Act, 2063 B.S.
Main characteristics:
- Voluntary association: A company is formed by people who come together voluntarily and contribute capital to earn profit.
- Artificial person created by law: It comes into existence only when it is incorporated under the Companies Act. It cannot act physically, so it works through its directors.
- Separate legal entity: The company is separate from its shareholders. It can own property, make contracts, and sue and be sued in its own name.
- Perpetual succession: Its life does not depend on its members. The death, insolvency or retirement of a shareholder does not end the company.
- Common seal: The common seal acts as the official signature of the company on important documents.
- Limited liability: The liability of shareholders is limited to the nominal (face) value of the shares they hold; their personal property cannot be used to pay the company’s debts.
- Capital divided into transferable shares: The capital is divided into shares. Shares of a public company can be freely transferred, while those of a private company are transferred only under the restrictions in its Articles of Association.
- Separation of ownership and management: The shareholders own the company, but it is managed by a Board of Directors elected by them.
Differences between a Private Limited Company and a Public Limited Company:
| Basis | Private Limited Company (Pvt. Ltd.) | Public Limited Company (Ltd.) |
|---|---|---|
| Number of shareholders | Minimum 1 and maximum 101 | Minimum 7, with no upper limit |
| Invitation to the public | Cannot issue a prospectus inviting the general public to buy its shares or debentures | Can issue a prospectus (IPO or FPO) inviting the general public to subscribe to its shares and debentures |
| Transfer of shares | Restricted by its Articles of Association | Freely transferable and traded on the Nepal Stock Exchange (NEPSE) |
| Minimum paid-up capital | No high statutory minimum; fixed by the promoters in the Memorandum | Rs. 1,00,00,000 (Rs. 10 million) under the Companies Act; higher for banks and insurance companies |
| Number of directors | As specified in its Articles of Association (up to 11) | Minimum 3 and maximum 11, including at least one independent director and female representation |
| Name suffix | Must end its name with “Private Limited (Pvt. Ltd.)” | Must end its name with “Limited (Ltd.)” |
| Examples in Nepal | Units of the Chaudhary Group, Pathao Nepal | Nabil Bank Ltd., Nepal Telecom Ltd. |
Conclusion: A joint stock company combines limited liability, perpetual succession and transferable shares, which lets it collect large capital from many people. A private limited company suits a family or small group that wants limited liability while keeping control in a few hands, whereas a public limited company suits large undertakings such as banks and telecom companies that need capital from thousands of investors.
Unit 9 Solutions: Assembly, Meeting, Conference & Seminar
Answers to the Unit 9 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and a complete model minute, laid out like the specimen in the unit, for the 8-mark drafting question.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Define a meeting in one sentence.
A meeting is a formal gathering of two or more authorized members of a committee, board or organization at a pre-notified date, time and venue to discuss a specific agenda and pass binding resolutions.
2. What is meant by Agenda and Quorum of a meeting?
An agenda is the ordered list of topics or proposals to be discussed and decided in a meeting, sent out with the notice, and a quorum is the minimum number or percentage of eligible members (usually more than 50%) who must be present before the meeting can legally begin and pass valid resolutions.
3. Differentiate between an Assembly and a Seminar in two sentences.
An assembly is a large formal gathering of all general members, shareholders, citizens or students to hear announcements, elect representatives or approve broad policies, such as a school morning assembly or the general assembly of a cooperative. A seminar is an academic or professional gathering where subject experts present working papers on one specific topic, followed by discussion and conclusions.
4. When is an Extraordinary General Meeting (EGM) convened?
An EGM is convened by the Board of Directors, or on the written requisition of a specified percentage of shareholders, between two Annual General Meetings to decide urgent special business such as amending the Memorandum or Articles of Association, issuing bonus or right shares, or merging the company.
5. What is meant by Minute of a meeting?
A minute is the official, concise and chronological written record of the attendance, discussions and decisions (resolutions) of a formal meeting, kept in a bound Minute Book and signed by the Chairperson and the attending members.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Explain any four types of meetings held in organizations.
- Regular (committee or periodic) meeting: This meeting is held at fixed, pre-scheduled intervals, such as weekly, monthly or quarterly, as the rules of the organization require. It reviews ongoing work and approves routine expenditure, as in the monthly meeting of a School Management Committee.
- Urgent (emergency) meeting: This meeting is called at very short notice when an unexpected crisis, natural disaster or urgent policy matter arises that cannot wait until the next regular meeting, for example after a flood damages school buildings.
- Board (executive committee) meeting: This meeting is held by the elected Board of Directors of a company or the Executive Committee of an institution. It formulates strategies, appoints senior staff and approves budgets.
- Annual General Meeting (AGM): This statutory meeting is held once every fiscal year by a joint stock company, cooperative or registered association, and all shareholders or members can take part. It approves the annual financial statements and auditor’s report, declares dividends, elects the Board of Directors and appoints the auditor for the next year.
Other types are the Extraordinary General Meeting (EGM), unilateral, bilateral and multilateral meetings, and secret (in-camera) meetings.
2. Differentiate between an Annual General Meeting (AGM) and an Extraordinary General Meeting (EGM).
| Basis | Annual General Meeting (AGM) | Extraordinary General Meeting (EGM) |
|---|---|---|
| Meaning | The statutory general meeting of all shareholders or members held every year | A special general meeting called between two AGMs for urgent special business |
| Frequency | Held once every fiscal year | Held whenever special business arises; there may be none in a year, or more than one |
| Nature | Compulsory by law | Not a fixed yearly requirement; held only when needed |
| Convened by | The Board of Directors | The Board of Directors, or on the written requisition of a specified percentage of shareholders |
| Business transacted | Ordinary business: approving the annual financial statements and auditor’s report, declaring dividends, electing directors, and appointing the auditor and fixing his or her remuneration | Special business: amending the Memorandum or Articles of Association, issuing bonus or right shares, or merging the company |
| Example | A company’s yearly meeting to approve its accounts and declare a dividend | A meeting called in the middle of the year to approve a merger with another company |
3. What is a Minute? Explain the importance of maintaining minutes of a meeting.
A minute is the official, concise and chronological written record of the attendance, discussions and final decisions (resolutions) of a formal meeting. It is recorded in a bound Minute Book and signed by the Chairperson and all attending members.
Importance of maintaining minutes:
- Permanent record of decisions: Members cannot remember every decision for long. Minutes keep an exact, permanent record of who attended and what was decided at each meeting.
- Legal evidence: Signed minutes are accepted as proof of the decisions of a meeting. Auditors, government bodies and courts can check them, for example to see whether a purchase was properly approved.
- Basis for implementation and follow-up: Minutes state each decision and the person responsible for carrying it out. At the next meeting, members can check the progress made on each decision.
- Reference for the future: New members and later committees can read past minutes to understand earlier decisions, which keeps policies consistent and avoids repeating the same discussions.
Minutes also inform absent members of what was decided, and reading and confirming them at the next meeting (endorsement) prevents later disputes.
C. Long Practical / Drafting Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. Draft a complete Minute of an imaginary meeting held at your school (or a local youth club) regarding the organization of the Annual Sports Week and Cultural Program, clearly showing the Preamble, Attendance, Agendas, and Decisions.
All names, dates and figures in this model minute are imaginary.
MINUTE OF THE STAFF MEETING OF SHREE JANA JAGRITI SECONDARY SCHOOL
Today, on 2082 Bhadra 15, Sunday, at 2:00 P.M., a staff meeting of Shree Jana Jagriti Secondary School, Bharatpur-11, Chitwan was held in the school meeting hall under the chairpersonship of Principal Mr. Dipak Raj Subedi to plan the Annual Sports Week and Cultural Program of 2082. The President of the Student Council attended the meeting as an invitee.
1. Attendance:
S.N. Name of the Member Designation Signature 1. Mr. Dipak Raj Subedi Principal & Chairperson D.R. Subedi 2. Mrs. Sarita Khanal Vice-Principal S. Khanal 3. Mr. Ramesh Chaudhary Sports Teacher & Member-Secretary R. Chaudhary 4. Mrs. Laxmi Shrestha Music and Arts Teacher L. Shrestha 5. Mr. Bikash Tamang Science Teacher B. Tamang 6. Ms. Anita Poudel Basic Level Teacher A. Poudel 7. Mr. Suresh Mahato Accountant S. Mahato 8. Ms. Pratiksha Bhattarai President, Student Council (Invitee) P. Bhattarai 2. Agendas for Discussion:
- Agenda No. 1: Regarding the dates, venue and events of the Annual Sports Week 2082.
- Agenda No. 2: Regarding the Cultural Program and Prize Distribution Ceremony.
- Agenda No. 3: Regarding the formation of sub-committees and the assignment of responsibilities.
- Agenda No. 4: Regarding the budget and sources of funds.
- Agenda No. 5: Miscellaneous.
3. Decisions / Resolutions Passed:
- Decision No. 1: After detailed discussion on Agenda No. 1, it was unanimously decided to hold the Annual Sports Week from 2082 Mangsir 8 to Mangsir 13 in the school ground. All students of Grades 1 to 10 will take part through four houses: Sagarmatha, Kanchenjunga, Makalu and Annapurna. The events for Grades 6 to 10 will be athletics (100 m, 200 m and 400 m races, relay race, long jump and high jump), football, volleyball, table tennis and chess, and the events for Grades 1 to 5 will be the sack race, the spoon-and-marble race and musical chairs.
- Decision No. 2: Regarding Agenda No. 2, it was decided to hold the Cultural Program and Prize Distribution Ceremony on the last day of the Sports Week, 2082 Mangsir 13, from 1:00 P.M. The program will include folk and classical dances, songs, a short drama on road safety and poem recitation by students of each house. The Chairperson of Ward No. 11 of Bharatpur Metropolitan City will be invited as the Chief Guest, and all guardians will be invited by letter. Medals and certificates will be given to the first, second and third place winners of each event, and a running shield to the house with the highest total points.
- Decision No. 3: Regarding Agenda No. 3, it was decided to form the following sub-committees, each of which will report its progress to the Member-Secretary by 2082 Kartik 25:
- Sports Management Sub-committee: Mr. Ramesh Chaudhary (Coordinator) and Mr. Bikash Tamang, to prepare the event schedule, the ground and the equipment, and to arrange referees and judges.
- Cultural Program Sub-committee: Mrs. Laxmi Shrestha (Coordinator) and Ms. Pratiksha Bhattarai, to select and rehearse the items and to manage the stage and sound system.
- Discipline, First Aid and Refreshment Sub-committee: Mrs. Sarita Khanal (Coordinator) and Ms. Anita Poudel, to maintain discipline, arrange first aid with the help of the local health post, and provide drinking water and refreshments.
- Finance and Purchase Sub-committee: Mr. Suresh Mahato (Coordinator), to purchase medals, certificates and sports equipment and to keep the accounts of all income and expenses.
- Decision No. 4: Regarding Agenda No. 4, it was decided to approve a total budget of Rs. 1,50,000 for the Sports Week and Cultural Program, to be met from the school sports fund (Rs. 80,000), a grant from the Ward Office (Rs. 40,000) and sponsorship from local businesses (Rs. 30,000). The Principal will write to the Ward Office requesting the grant. All purchases will be made by inviting quotations, and the accounts will be presented at the first staff meeting after the program.
- Decision No. 5: As there were no other matters under Miscellaneous, the Chairperson thanked all attending members and declared the meeting adjourned at 4:00 P.M.
Signatures Confirming the Decisions:
(Signed by the Chairperson and all members present)
Unit 10 Solutions: Bookkeeping and Accounting
Answers to the Unit 10 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Define bookkeeping in one sentence.
Bookkeeping is the systematic, day-to-day art and science of recording financial transactions in the books of original entry and posting them into ledger accounts.
2. Who is regarded as the Father of Modern Bookkeeping, and in which year was his book published?
Fra Luca Pacioli, an Italian Franciscan friar and mathematician, is regarded as the Father of Modern Bookkeeping. His book Summa de Arithmetica, Geometria, Proportioni et Proportionalita, which first set out the Double Entry System, was published in Venice in 1494 A.D.
3. Define accounting according to the AICPA.
According to the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA), “Accounting is the art of recording, classifying, and summarizing in a significant manner and in terms of money, transactions and events which are, in part at least, of a financial character, and interpreting the results thereof.”
4. Name the four major branches of accounting.
Financial Accounting, Cost Accounting, Management Accounting and Government Accounting.
5. List the sequential steps of the Accounting Cycle.
Identification of transactions from source documents → Recording in the Journal and Subsidiary Books → Classifying (posting to and balancing the Ledger) → Summarizing in the Trial Balance → Preparing the Final Accounts → Analysis, interpretation and communication of the results.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Explain any four objectives and four limitations of accounting.
Objectives of accounting:
- Maintaining complete and systematic records: Human memory is limited, so accounting records every monetary transaction in date order. No cash receipt, credit sale or expense is forgotten, and the record can be checked later.
- Ascertaining profit or loss: At the end of the fiscal year, the Income Statement (Trading and Profit & Loss Account) is prepared to find out whether the business earned a net profit or suffered a net loss.
- Showing the true financial position: The Balance Sheet, prepared on the closing date of the fiscal year, shows the exact balances of the assets, liabilities and capital of the business.
- Communicating financial information to users: Accounting supplies reliable reports to internal users (owners, directors, managers and employees) and external users (banks, investors, creditors, the Inland Revenue Department and researchers).
Two more objectives given in the unit are assessing liquidity and solvency, and preventing and detecting errors and frauds.
Limitations of accounting:
- Records only monetary transactions: Qualities such as employee honesty, managerial skill, customer loyalty or good industrial relations are not recorded, because they cannot be measured in money, even though they affect the success of the business.
- Based on historical cost: Fixed assets are shown at their original purchase price, not at their current market or replacement value, so the effect of rising prices is ignored.
- Influenced by personal judgment: Figures such as the useful life of an asset (for depreciation) or the provision for doubtful debts are estimates, so two accountants may show different results for the same business.
- Possibility of window dressing: Dishonest management may manipulate the figures for a time to make the Balance Sheet look stronger than it really is.
2. Differentiate between Bookkeeping and Accounting on any five bases.
| Basis | Bookkeeping | Accounting |
|---|---|---|
| Scope and stage | Primary stage and narrower in scope; limited to identifying, recording (Journal and Subsidiary Books) and classifying (Ledger) transactions | Secondary stage and wider in scope; includes bookkeeping and extends to summarizing, analyzing, interpreting and communicating the results |
| Objective | To keep systematic, chronological and permanent records of day-to-day transactions | To find the net profit or loss and the financial position of the business and communicate them to decision-makers |
| Nature of work | Routine, clerical and repetitive | Analytical, executive and interpretive |
| Personnel and skill | Done by a junior clerk or bookkeeper with basic knowledge of the rules of debit and credit | Done by a senior accountant or Chartered Accountant with expert knowledge of accounting standards (NFRS/GAAP), tax laws and financial analysis |
| Financial statements | The Trading Account, Profit & Loss Account and Balance Sheet are not prepared | Preparing and interpreting the final accounts and financial statements is its main output |
| Decision making | Management cannot take strategic decisions from raw ledger records alone | Management uses accounting statements and ratios directly to make plans, budgets and policies |
| Dependence | Does not depend on accounting; it is the starting point | Depends on bookkeeping, because it starts from the ledger balances that bookkeeping produces |
3. Briefly explain Financial Accounting, Cost Accounting, and Management Accounting.
- Financial Accounting: Financial accounting records the past transactions of a business in the Journal and Ledger and uses them to prepare the Trial Balance, the Income Statement (Trading and Profit & Loss Account) and the Balance Sheet. It shows the profit or loss for the year and the financial position on the closing date, and its reports are used by both internal users (owners and managers) and external users (banks, investors, creditors and tax authorities).
- Cost Accounting: Cost accounting identifies, classifies, allocates and controls the total cost and the per-unit cost of making a product or providing a service. The cost is broken into material cost, labour cost and overhead expenses. This helps management fix selling prices, compare costs from period to period and reduce waste. For example, a biscuit factory uses cost accounting to find the cost of making one packet of biscuits.
- Management Accounting: Management accounting uses financial and cost data together with tools such as ratio analysis, budgeting, break-even (CVP) analysis and cash flow statements. Its purpose is to help internal management plan for the future, frame policies and make decisions. Financial accounting mainly records the past, while management accounting looks ahead.
The fourth branch, Government Accounting, keeps the records of public revenue, budget appropriations and public expenditure of government offices on a cash and budgetary basis.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. “Accounting begins where bookkeeping ends.” Justify this statement by explaining the scope, functions, and complete Accounting Process (Cycle) of a business organization.
Bookkeeping and accounting are two stages of the same financial information system. Bookkeeping records transactions in the Journal and Subsidiary Books and classifies them in the Ledger. Accounting takes over the balanced ledger accounts that bookkeeping produces and summarizes, analyzes, interprets and communicates them. Bookkeeping lays the foundation (Journal and Ledger), and accounting builds the superstructure (Trial Balance, Final Accounts and financial analysis) on top of it. The statement can be justified by looking at the scope, functions and process of accounting.
Scope:
- Scope of bookkeeping: Bookkeeping covers identifying transactions from source documents, recording them in the books of original entry, and classifying them by posting them to the Ledger and balancing each account. It is routine, clerical work done by a junior clerk or bookkeeper.
- Scope of accounting: Accounting includes all of bookkeeping and goes further: it summarizes the ledger balances in the Trial Balance and Final Accounts, analyzes and interprets them, and communicates the results to users. It is done by a senior accountant, and it has four branches: financial, cost, management and government accounting.
Functions of accounting:
- Keeping complete records: All monetary transactions are recorded systematically. This function is carried out through bookkeeping.
- Ascertaining profit or loss: The Trading and Profit & Loss Account shows the gross and net profit or loss of the year.
- Showing the financial position: The Balance Sheet shows the assets, liabilities and capital on the last day of the fiscal year.
- Assessing liquidity and solvency: Accounting tracks cash, debtors and creditors so that the firm can pay its short-term and long-term debts on time.
- Communicating information: Reports go to internal users (owners, directors, managers, employees) and external users (banks, investors, creditors, the Inland Revenue Department).
- Preventing and detecting errors and frauds: The Trial Balance and voucher checking support internal check and statutory audit.
Only the first function is bookkeeping; the other five can begin only after the books have been written up.
The Accounting Process (Cycle):
- Identification and source documents: A transaction is recorded only when an invoice, cash memo, receipt, pay-in-slip or debit/credit note proves that it has taken place.
- Recording (journalizing): Both the debit and credit aspects of each transaction are recorded in date order in the Journal and the Subsidiary Books (Purchase Book, Sales Book, Return Books and Cash Book).
- Classifying (posting and balancing): Entries are posted to individual Ledger accounts, and each account is balanced (
Balance c/dandBalance b/d). Bookkeeping ends here. - Summarizing (Trial Balance): All debit and credit ledger balances are listed on a given date to check the arithmetical accuracy of the books. Accounting’s own work begins here.
- Preparing Final Accounts: The Trading Account, Profit & Loss Account and Balance Sheet are prepared to find the gross profit or loss, the net profit or loss and the financial position at year-end.
- Analysis, interpretation and communication: Financial ratios, audit reports and AGM presentations explain the results to management and outside stakeholders so that they can make decisions.
This cycle is repeated every fiscal year (Shrawan 1 to the end of Ashadh in Nepal).
Conclusion: Accounting includes bookkeeping, but its distinctive work of summarizing, analyzing and interpreting can start only when bookkeeping has finished recording and classifying the transactions. Without balanced ledger accounts there can be no Trial Balance, no Final Accounts and no analysis. Steps 1 to 3 of the cycle belong to bookkeeping and Steps 4 to 6 to accounting, so it is rightly said that accounting begins where bookkeeping ends.
Unit 11 Solutions: Basic Accounting Concepts & Systems
Answers to the Unit 11 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. State the Accounting Equation.
Assets = Capital + Liabilities. It follows from the Dual Aspect Concept: the resources owned by a business are always equal to the claims of the owner and outsiders against those resources.
2. Under which accounting concept is the proprietor treated as a creditor of the business for their capital?
Under the Business Entity Concept. Because the business is treated as separate from its owner, the capital invested by the proprietor is shown as an amount the business owes to the owner.
3. What is meant by a Fiscal Year?
A Fiscal (Financial) Year is a continuous 12-month period adopted for closing the accounts and preparing financial statements; in Nepal, it runs from Shrawan 1 to the end of Ashadh (roughly mid-July to mid-July).
4. Define Fictitious Assets with two examples.
Fictitious assets are deferred revenue expenditures or accumulated losses shown temporarily on the asset side of the Balance Sheet until they are written off against future profits; they have no resale value. Examples: Preliminary Expenses and Discount (Loss) on Issue of Shares or Debentures.
5. What is Bad Debt?
Bad debt is the amount due from a debtor that cannot be recovered because the debtor has become insolvent or dishonest, so it is written off as a loss.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Differentiate between Single Entry System and Double Entry System on any four bases.
| Basis | Single Entry System | Double Entry System |
|---|---|---|
| Dual aspect | Records only one aspect of a transaction, or omits both aspects for non-cash real and nominal items | Records both aspects (debit and credit) of every transaction |
| Accounts maintained | Only the personal accounts of debtors and creditors and the Cash Book; real and nominal accounts are not opened | All three classes of accounts: personal, real and nominal |
| Trial Balance | Cannot be prepared, so the arithmetical accuracy of the books cannot be checked | Prepared regularly to check that total debits equal total credits |
| Profit or loss | Only an estimated profit or loss, found by comparing opening and closing capital | Exact gross and net profit or loss, found by preparing the Trading and Profit & Loss Account |
| Balance Sheet | A true Balance Sheet cannot be prepared, because real asset accounts are not kept | A true Balance Sheet is prepared, showing exact assets, liabilities and capital |
| Legal and tax recognition | Not accepted by the Inland Revenue Department, banks or courts of law | Accepted everywhere by tax authorities, auditors, banks and courts |
The unit adds one more basis, suitability: the single entry system suits only very small petty traders, while the double entry system suits every type of organization.
2. Explain the Business Entity Concept, Money Measurement Concept, Going Concern Concept, and Matching Concept.
- Business Entity Concept: The business is treated as a separate and distinct unit from its owner. Only the transactions of the business are recorded in its books, and the owner’s private dealings are kept out. For example, when the proprietor invests Rs. 5,00,000 in the business, the business shows it as Capital, an amount owed to the owner. When the owner takes Rs. 10,000 for household expenses, it is recorded as Drawings, not as a business expense.
- Money Measurement Concept: Only those transactions and events that can be expressed in money (Nepalese Rupees) are recorded in the books. Events that cannot be measured in money, such as a quarrel between two managers or the high skill of a worker, are not recorded, even if they affect the business.
- Going Concern Concept: It is assumed that the business will continue to operate in the foreseeable future and has no intention of closing down. For this reason, fixed assets are recorded at historical cost and depreciated over their useful life, instead of being valued at the price they would fetch if the business were closed and the assets sold at once.
- Matching Concept: To find the true profit or loss of an accounting period, the revenue earned in that period is matched against all the expenses incurred to earn it, whether paid or still outstanding. For example, salary for the last month of the year that is still unpaid is treated as an expense of that year, not of the year in which it is paid.
3. Differentiate between Trade Discount and Cash Discount.
| Basis | Trade Discount | Cash Discount |
|---|---|---|
| Meaning and purpose | A deduction on the catalogue or list price allowed by a manufacturer or wholesaler to encourage bulk purchases | A deduction allowed by a creditor to a debtor to encourage prompt payment within a stated time |
| When allowed | At the time of buying or selling goods, for cash or on credit | Only at the time of making or receiving payment in cash or by cheque |
| Shown in the invoice | Deducted on the face of the invoice; entries are made at the net amount | Not deducted in the invoice; calculated at the time of settlement |
| Recording in the books | Never recorded separately in the Journal or Ledger | Always recorded in the Journal and Cash Book as Discount Allowed A/c (Dr., expense) or Discount Received A/c (Cr., income) |
| Basis of the rate | Depends on the quantity bought | Depends on how early the payment is made |
| Profit & Loss Account | Not shown as an expense or income | Discount allowed is shown as a loss and discount received as a gain |
Example: Goods with a list price of Rs. 10,000 are sold at 10% trade discount, so the invoice and the entry are for Rs. 9,000 only. If the buyer pays early and gets a 2% cash discount, the seller receives Rs. 8,820 and records Rs. 180 as Discount Allowed.
4. Distinguish between: (a) Fixed Assets and Current Assets, and (b) Debtors and Creditors.
(a) Fixed Assets and Current Assets
| Basis | Fixed Assets | Current Assets |
|---|---|---|
| Meaning | Assets acquired for long-term use in the business, not for resale | Cash and assets expected to be converted into cash within one accounting year |
| Period | Used for more than one year | Held for less than one year |
| Purpose | To run the business and earn income over many years | For day-to-day operations and for paying short-term debts |
| Depreciation | Charged on tangible fixed assets (except land) | Not charged |
| Examples | Land & Building, Plant & Machinery, Furniture, Vehicles | Cash in hand, Cash at bank, Sundry Debtors, Bills Receivable, Closing Stock, Prepaid Expenses |
(b) Debtors and Creditors
| Basis | Debtors (Accounts Receivable) | Creditors (Accounts Payable) |
|---|---|---|
| Meaning | Persons or firms to whom the business has sold goods on credit | Persons or suppliers from whom the business has bought goods on credit |
| Amount | Money is receivable from them | Money is payable to them |
| Nature | Current asset | Current liability |
| Ledger balance | Their accounts show a debit balance | Their accounts show a credit balance |
| Cash discount | The business allows discount to them (Discount Allowed) | The business receives discount from them (Discount Received) |
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. What is the Double Entry System of bookkeeping? Explain its features, objectives, and advantages in detail.
Meaning: The Double Entry System is the modern, scientific, complete and universally accepted system of bookkeeping, set out by Luca Pacioli in 1494 A.D. It recognizes that every financial transaction has two equal and opposite aspects: a receiving aspect (Debit) and a giving aspect (Credit). For every debit there must be a credit of an equal amount. According to J.R. Batliboi, “Every business transaction has a two-fold effect and that affects two accounts in opposite directions, and if a complete record were to be made of each such transaction, it would be necessary to debit one account and credit another account.”
Features:
- Two aspects of every transaction: Each transaction has a receiving aspect and a giving aspect. When Ramesh starts a business with cash Rs. 2,00,000, Cash A/c is debited and Capital A/c is credited.
- At least two accounts affected: Every transaction affects at least two accounts in opposite directions. When furniture worth Rs. 40,000 is bought on credit from Koshi Furniture, Furniture A/c is debited and Koshi Furniture A/c is credited.
- Equal debit and credit: The amount debited is always equal to the amount credited, so the total of all debits equals the total of all credits.
- All classes of accounts kept: Personal, real and nominal accounts (or assets, liabilities, capital, revenue and expenses) are all maintained.
- Fixed rules of debit and credit: Every entry follows set rules (the golden rules or the modern accounting-equation rules), so all accountants record a transaction in the same way.
- Self-balancing and verifiable: Because debits equal credits, a Trial Balance can be prepared to test the arithmetical accuracy of the books.
Objectives:
- To keep a complete, systematic and permanent record of every financial transaction.
- To find the exact profit or loss of the business for each fiscal year.
- To show the true financial position of the business on a particular date.
- To check the arithmetical accuracy of the books and to prevent and detect errors and frauds.
- To provide reliable information to owners, managers, banks, investors and the tax office.
Advantages:
- Complete and scientific record: Both aspects of every transaction are recorded, so the books give a full picture of the business.
- Check on arithmetical accuracy: The Trial Balance shows at once whether total debits equal total credits.
- Exact profit or loss: The Trading and Profit & Loss Account can be prepared, because all expense and income (nominal) accounts are kept.
- True financial position: A Balance Sheet can be prepared from the real and personal accounts, showing exact assets, liabilities and capital.
- Information about debtors and creditors: Personal accounts show at any time how much is receivable from each customer and payable to each supplier.
- Prevention of errors and frauds: Regular balancing and the Trial Balance make it hard for mistakes and fraud to go unnoticed.
- Comparison and decision making: Results of different years can be compared, which helps management plan budgets and policies.
- Legal and tax recognition: Books kept on this system are accepted as authentic evidence by the Inland Revenue Department, auditors, banks and courts of law.
Conclusion: The Double Entry System overcomes all the weaknesses of the single entry system. It records transactions completely, proves their accuracy through the Trial Balance and makes it possible to prepare the final accounts. That is why it is used by small, medium and large businesses, companies and banks, and also forms the basis of Nepal’s New Accounting System for government offices.
Unit 12 Solutions: Journal Entries
Answers to the Unit 12 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, and full working for each numerical problem.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Why is the Journal called the Book of Original Entry?
The Journal is called the Book of Original Entry because every transaction is recorded in it first, in date order, directly from the source vouchers, before it is posted to the Ledger.
2. What is meant by Journalizing and Narration?
Journalizing is the process of analyzing a transaction and recording it in the Journal. A Narration is the short explanation written in brackets (Being ...) just below each journal entry.
3. State the Golden Rules of Debit and Credit for Personal, Real, and Nominal accounts.
- Personal Account: Debit the receiver, credit the giver.
- Real Account: Debit what comes in, credit what goes out.
- Nominal Account: Debit all expenses and losses, credit all incomes and gains.
4. Why is Purchase A/c credited when the proprietor withdraws goods for personal use?
The goods were debited to Purchase A/c when they were bought, so when the owner takes some of them out of the business, Purchase A/c is credited at cost price to reduce the goods (what goes out is credited), and Drawing A/c is debited.
B. Numerical Problems for Practice (6 to 8 Marks Each)
Problem 12.1: Journalize the following transactions in the books of Siddhartha Traders, Butwal for Jestha 2082:
- Jestha 1: Started business with cash Rs. 3,00,000 and goods worth Rs. 80,000.
- Jestha 4: Deposited cash into Everest Bank Ltd. Rs. 1,80,000.
- Jestha 8: Purchased goods from Nima for Rs. 40,000 and paid Rs. 15,000 immediately by cheque.
- Jestha 12: Purchased a computer for office use for Rs. 45,000 and paid by cheque.
- Jestha 16: Sold goods to Bhuwan for Rs. 30,000 at a 10% trade discount.
- Jestha 20: Settled Nima’s account by paying cash Rs. 24,000 in full settlement.
- Jestha 25: Received Rs. 26,000 from Bhuwan in full settlement of his account.
- Jestha 28: Charged 10% depreciation on the computer costing Rs. 45,000.
- Jestha 30: Received Rs. 2,500 cash from Ram, whose debt had been written off as a bad debt last year.
Journal Entries in the Books of Siddhartha Traders, Butwal
| Date | Particulars | L.F. | Debit (Rs.) | Credit (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-02-01 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. Purchase A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Capital A/c (Being business started with cash and goods) | 3,00,000 80,000 | 3,80,000 | |
| 2082-02-04 | Bank A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. To Cash A/c (Being cash deposited into Everest Bank Ltd.) | 1,80,000 | 1,80,000 | |
| 2082-02-08 | Purchase A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Bank A/c To Nima’s A/c (Being goods purchased from Nima, Rs. 15,000 paid by cheque and the balance on credit: 40,000 - 15,000 = 25,000) | 40,000 | 15,000 25,000 | |
| 2082-02-12 | Computer A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Bank A/c (Being computer purchased for office use and paid by cheque) | 45,000 | 45,000 | |
| 2082-02-16 | Bhuwan’s A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Sales A/c (Being goods of Rs. 30,000 sold on credit to Bhuwan at 10% trade discount: 30,000 - 3,000 = 27,000) | 27,000 | 27,000 | |
| 2082-02-20 | Nima’s A/c ……………………………………………… Dr. To Cash A/c To Discount Received A/c (Being cash paid to Nima in full settlement of Rs. 25,000 and discount received) | 25,000 | 24,000 1,000 | |
| 2082-02-25 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. Discount Allowed A/c …………………………………….. Dr. To Bhuwan’s A/c (Being cash received from Bhuwan in full settlement of Rs. 27,000 and discount allowed) | 26,000 1,000 | 27,000 | |
| 2082-02-28 | Depreciation A/c ………………………………………… Dr. To Computer A/c (Being 10% depreciation charged on computer: 10% of 45,000 = 4,500) | 4,500 | 4,500 | |
| 2082-02-30 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. To Bad Debts Recovered A/c (Being bad debt of Ram written off last year now recovered in cash) | 2,500 | 2,500 | |
| Grand Total | 7,31,000 | 7,31,000 |
Answer: The Grand Total of the Journal is Rs. 7,31,000 on both the Debit and Credit sides.
Working notes:
- Jestha 1: Goods brought in by the owner are debited to
Purchase A/c(the chapter’s master guide also allowsStock of Goods A/c); Capital is the total of cash and goods,3,00,000 + 80,000 = 3,80,000. - Jestha 8: Nima’s name is given and only Rs. 15,000 is paid, so the balance of Rs. 25,000 is a credit purchase and Nima becomes a creditor.
- Jestha 12: A computer for office use is a fixed asset, so
Computer A/cis debited, neverPurchase A/c. - Jestha 16: Trade discount is never entered in the books. Only the net amount of Rs. 27,000 is recorded, so Bhuwan owes Rs. 27,000, not Rs. 30,000.
- Jestha 20: Nima was owed Rs. 25,000 (from Jestha 8) and accepted Rs. 24,000, so discount received is
25,000 - 24,000 = 1,000. - Jestha 25: Bhuwan owed Rs. 27,000 and paid Rs. 26,000, so discount allowed is
27,000 - 26,000 = 1,000. - Jestha 30: Ram’s account was closed when his debt was written off, so the recovery is credited to
Bad Debts Recovered A/c, not to Ram’s A/c.
Unit 13 Solutions: Ledger
Answers to the Unit 13 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, and full working for each numerical problem.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Why is the Ledger called the Principal Book of Accounts?
The Ledger is called the Principal Book of Accounts because it keeps a classified and permanent record of every account in one place, and the Trial Balance and final accounts are prepared directly from its balances.
2. Define Posting and Balancing of a Ledger Account.
Posting is the process of transferring entries from the Journal (and subsidiary books) to the respective Ledger accounts. Balancing is finding the difference between the two sides of a Ledger account and writing it on the shorter side as Balance c/d, so that both sides show the same total.
3. What do c/d and b/d stand for in ledger balancing?
c/d stands for carried down (the balance written on the shorter side to close the account for the period), and b/d stands for brought down (the same balance shown on the opposite side at the start of the next period).
4. What does a Debit balance in a Personal Account signify? What does a Credit balance signify?
A Debit balance in a Personal Account means the person is a Debtor who owes money to the business; a Credit balance means the person is a Creditor to whom the business owes money.
B. Numerical Problems for Practice (8 Marks Each)
Problem 13.1: From the following transactions of Lumbini Store, prepare Furniture Account and Pradhan’s Account and balance them:
- Opening balance of Furniture on Chaitra 1: Rs. 90,000.
- Chaitra 5: Purchased furniture on credit from Pradhan for Rs. 25,000.
- Chaitra 12: Purchased additional furniture for cash Rs. 15,000.
- Chaitra 18: Returned damaged furniture worth Rs. 3,000 to Pradhan.
- Chaitra 22: Sold old furniture costing Rs. 10,000 for cash Rs. 10,000.
- Chaitra 26: Paid cash Rs. 21,000 to Pradhan in full settlement of his account.
- Chaitra 30: Provided depreciation on furniture Rs. 7,000.
Step 1: Journal Entries
| Date | Particulars | L.F. | Debit (Rs.) | Credit (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-12-05 | Furniture A/c …………………………………………… Dr. To Pradhan’s A/c (Being furniture purchased on credit from Pradhan) | 25,000 | 25,000 | |
| 2082-12-12 | Furniture A/c …………………………………………… Dr. To Cash A/c (Being furniture purchased for cash) | 15,000 | 15,000 | |
| 2082-12-18 | Pradhan’s A/c …………………………………………… Dr. To Furniture A/c (Being damaged furniture returned to Pradhan) | 3,000 | 3,000 | |
| 2082-12-22 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. To Furniture A/c (Being old furniture costing Rs. 10,000 sold for cash at cost) | 10,000 | 10,000 | |
| 2082-12-26 | Pradhan’s A/c …………………………………………… Dr. To Cash A/c To Discount Received A/c (Being cash paid to Pradhan in full settlement of Rs. 22,000 [ 25,000 - 3,000] and discount received) | 22,000 | 21,000 1,000 | |
| 2082-12-30 | Depreciation A/c ………………………………………… Dr. To Furniture A/c (Being depreciation charged on furniture) | 7,000 | 7,000 |
Step 2: Ledger Accounts
1. Dr. …………………………………………… Furniture Account …………………………………………… Cr.
| Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-12-01 | To Balance b/d | 90,000 | 2082-12-18 | By Pradhan’s A/c | 3,000 | ||
| 2082-12-05 | To Pradhan’s A/c | 25,000 | 2082-12-22 | By Cash A/c | 10,000 | ||
| 2082-12-12 | To Cash A/c | 15,000 | 2082-12-30 | By Depreciation A/c | 7,000 | ||
| 2082-12-30 | By Balance c/d | 1,10,000 | |||||
| Total | 1,30,000 | Total | 1,30,000 | ||||
| 2083-01-01 | To Balance b/d | 1,10,000 |
(Note: The Debit side (Rs. 1,30,000) is larger than the Credit side (Rs. 20,000), so Furniture Account has a closing Debit balance of Rs. 1,10,000, the value of furniture now held by the business.)
2. Dr. …………………………………………… Pradhan’s Account …………………………………………… Cr.
| Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-12-18 | To Furniture A/c | 3,000 | 2082-12-05 | By Furniture A/c | 25,000 | ||
| 2082-12-26 | To Cash A/c | 21,000 | |||||
| 2082-12-26 | To Discount Received A/c | 1,000 | |||||
| Total | 25,000 | Total | 25,000 |
(Note: Pradhan’s Account has equal Debit and Credit totals of Rs. 25,000, so his account is fully settled with zero closing balance, after a Discount Received of Rs. 1,000.)
Working notes:
- Opening balance: The Rs. 90,000 is not journalized; it is entered directly as
To Balance b/don the first day. - Chaitra 18: Furniture is a fixed asset, so the return is credited to
Furniture A/c, not toPurchase Return A/c(which is used only for goods bought for resale). - Chaitra 22: Furniture costing Rs. 10,000 was sold for Rs. 10,000, so there is no profit or loss on the sale and the full Rs. 10,000 is credited to
Furniture A/c. - Chaitra 26: After the return, Pradhan was owed
25,000 - 3,000 = 22,000. He accepted Rs. 21,000 in full settlement, so discount received is22,000 - 21,000 = 1,000. - Furniture balance:
90,000 + 25,000 + 15,000 - 3,000 - 10,000 - 7,000 = 1,10,000.
Unit 14 Solutions: Subsidiary Books & Cash Book
Answers to the Unit 14 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, and full working for each numerical problem.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Define Subsidiary Books and list any four types.
Subsidiary Books (also called Special Journals or Day Books) are the specialized books into which the Journal is divided, each recording only one class of transactions. Four types are the Purchase Book, Sales Book, Purchase Return Book and Sales Return Book (the Cash Book, Bills Books and Journal Proper are others).
2. What is a Debit Note and a Credit Note?
A Debit Note is the document issued to a supplier when goods are returned to him, showing that his account has been debited; it is the source of the Purchase Return Book. A Credit Note is the document issued to a customer when he returns goods, showing that his account has been credited; it is the source of the Sales Return Book.
3. Define a Contra Entry and state the two transactions in which it occurs.
A Contra Entry is a transaction that affects both the Cash Account and the Bank Account, so it is recorded on both sides of the Cash Book and marked C in the L.F. column. It occurs only when (1) cash is deposited into the bank, and (2) cash is withdrawn from the bank for office use.
4. Why are the Discount columns in a Cash Book not balanced?
The Discount Allowed column (an expense) and the Discount Received column (an income) belong to two separate, unrelated accounts, so each is only totalled and posted to its own account in the Ledger.
B. Numerical Problems for Practice (8 Marks Each)
Problem 14.1 (Purchase & Sales Books): From the following transactions of Janakpur Book House, prepare (a) Purchase Book and (b) Sales Book:
- Ashwin 2: Purchased from Ekta Publication, Kathmandu: 50 copies Grade 9 Account Book @ Rs. 400 each and 40 copies Science Book @ Rs. 500 each, less 15% trade discount.
- Ashwin 6: Sold to Mithila Boarding School on credit: 30 copies Grade 9 Account Book @ Rs. 450 each and 20 dozen Exercise Copies @ Rs. 600 per dozen.
- Ashwin 11: Purchased a revolving chair from Janaki Furniture on credit for Rs. 6,500.
- Ashwin 18: Purchased from Buddha Publication: 60 copies Economics Book @ Rs. 350 each, less 10% trade discount.
- Ashwin 24: Sold to Dhanusha Stationery on credit: 40 copies Science Book @ Rs. 550 each, less 10% trade discount.
- Ashwin 28: Sold old newspapers and books for cash Rs. 4,500.
(a) Purchase Book of Janakpur Book House
| Date | Particulars | Invoice No. | L.F. | Details (Rs.) | Total Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-06-02 | Ekta Publication, Kathmandu 50 copies Grade 9 Account Book @ Rs. 400 each 40 copies Science Book @ Rs. 500 each Sub-total Less: 15% Trade Discount | 20,000 20,000 40,000 (6,000) | 34,000 | ||
| 2082-06-18 | Buddha Publication 60 copies Economics Book @ Rs. 350 each Less: 10% Trade Discount | 21,000 (2,100) | 18,900 | ||
| 2082-06-30 | Total — Purchase A/c (Dr.) | 52,900 |
(b) Sales Book of Janakpur Book House
| Date | Particulars | Invoice No. | L.F. | Details (Rs.) | Total Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-06-06 | Mithila Boarding School 30 copies Grade 9 Account Book @ Rs. 450 each 20 dozen Exercise Copies @ Rs. 600 per dozen | 13,500 12,000 | 25,500 | ||
| 2082-06-24 | Dhanusha Stationery 40 copies Science Book @ Rs. 550 each Less: 10% Trade Discount | 22,000 (2,200) | 19,800 | ||
| 2082-06-30 | Total — Sales A/c (Cr.) | 45,300 |
Answer: Total of the Purchase Book = Rs. 52,900; Total of the Sales Book = Rs. 45,300.
Notes on Excluded Transactions:
- Ashwin 11: The revolving chair from Janaki Furniture is excluded from the Purchase Book because it is a fixed asset for the shop’s own use, not goods for resale (a credit purchase of an asset goes to the Journal Proper).
- Ashwin 28: The sale of old newspapers and books for Rs. 4,500 is excluded from the Sales Book because it is a cash sale (recorded in the Cash Book).
Working notes:
- Credit purchases: The Ashwin 2 and Ashwin 18 purchases name the supplier and do not say “for cash”, so they are credit purchases and belong in the Purchase Book.
- Trade discount: It is deducted on the face of the invoice, so only the net amounts (Rs. 34,000, Rs. 18,900 and Rs. 19,800) are carried to the Total column.
Problem 14.2 (Triple Column Cash Book): Prepare a Triple Column Cash Book from the following transactions for Kartik 2082:
- Kartik 1: Cash in hand Rs. 30,000; Cash at bank Rs. 50,000.
- Kartik 5: Cash deposited into bank Rs. 15,000.
- Kartik 9: Goods sold for Rs. 25,000; received Rs. 10,000 in cash and Rs. 15,000 by cheque.
- Kartik 14: Paid to Suman by cheque Rs. 11,600 in full settlement of Rs. 12,000.
- Kartik 19: Received cash from Pratima Rs. 8,700 in full settlement of Rs. 9,000.
- Kartik 24: Withdrew cash from bank for office use Rs. 8,000 and for domestic use Rs. 3,000.
- Kartik 29: Paid rent in cash Rs. 6,000 and salary by cheque Rs. 12,000.
Dr. ………………………………… Triple Column Cash Book ………………………………… Cr.
| Date | Particulars | L.F. | Cash (Rs.) | Bank (Rs.) | Disc. Allowed (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | L.F. | Cash (Rs.) | Bank (Rs.) | Disc. Received (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 082-07-01 | To Balance b/d | 30,000 | 50,000 | — | 082-07-05 | By Bank A/c | C | 15,000 | — | — | |
| 082-07-05 | To Cash A/c | C | — | 15,000 | — | 082-07-14 | By Suman’s A/c | — | 11,600 | 400 | |
| 082-07-09 | To Sales A/c | 10,000 | 15,000 | — | 082-07-24 | By Cash A/c | C | — | 8,000 | — | |
| 082-07-19 | To Pratima’s A/c | 8,700 | — | 300 | 082-07-24 | By Drawing A/c | — | 3,000 | — | ||
| 082-07-24 | To Bank A/c | C | 8,000 | — | — | 082-07-29 | By Rent A/c | 6,000 | — | — | |
| 082-07-29 | By Salary A/c | — | 12,000 | — | |||||||
| 082-07-30 | By Balance c/d | 35,700 | 45,400 | — | |||||||
| Total | 56,700 | 80,000 | 300 | Total | 56,700 | 80,000 | 400 | ||||
| 082-08-01 | To Balance b/d | 35,700 | 45,400 |
Answer: Closing Cash Balance = Rs. 35,700; Closing Bank Balance = Rs. 45,400; Discount Allowed = Rs. 300; Discount Received = Rs. 400.
Working notes:
- Contra entries (C): The Kartik 5 deposit (Rs. 15,000) and the Kartik 24 withdrawal for office use (Rs. 8,000) affect both cash and bank, so each is entered on both sides.
- Kartik 9: The cheque of Rs. 15,000 is treated as deposited into the bank the same day, so it goes in the Bank column.
- Kartik 14: Discount received from Suman is
12,000 - 11,600 = 400. - Kartik 19: Discount allowed to Pratima is
9,000 - 8,700 = 300. - Kartik 24: The Rs. 3,000 withdrawn for domestic use is Drawings from the Bank column, not a contra entry.
- Balances: Cash
56,700 - 21,000 = 35,700; Bank80,000 - 34,600 = 45,400. The Discount columns are only totalled, never balanced.
Unit 15 Solutions: Trial Balance & Accounting Errors
Answers to the Unit 15 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, and full working for the numerical problem.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Define a Trial Balance in one sentence.
A Trial Balance is a statement of all the Debit and Credit balances taken from the Ledger accounts and the Cash Book on a particular date to test the arithmetical accuracy of the books of accounts.
2. Name the three methods of preparing a Trial Balance.
The Total Method, the Balance Method and the Mixed (Compound) Method.
3. Why is the agreement of a Trial Balance not conclusive proof of absolute accuracy?
Because some errors do not affect the agreement of the Debit and Credit totals: errors of omission, errors of commission, errors of principle and compensating errors can all remain hidden in a Trial Balance that agrees.
4. When is a Suspense Account opened, and how is it closed?
A Suspense Account is opened when the Trial Balance does not agree and final accounts cannot wait, so the difference is put in it on the shorter side; it is closed as the errors are found and rectified through journal entries.
B. Numerical Problem for Practice (6 Marks)
Problem 15.1: Prepare a Trial Balance of Bhaktapur Traders as on the last day of Chaitra 2082 from the following balances:
Opening Stock Rs. 25,000 | Purchases Rs. 1,10,000 | Sales Rs. 1,95,000 | Capital Rs. 1,40,000 | Building Rs. 1,20,000 | Debtors Rs. 35,000 | Creditors Rs. 28,000 | Purchase Return Rs. 5,000 | Sales Return Rs. 7,000 | Wages Rs. 18,000 | Salaries Rs. 24,000 | Rent Paid Rs. 12,000 | Commission Received Rs. 6,000 | Cash at Bank Rs. 19,000 | Drawings Rs. 8,000 | Bad Debts Rs. 2,000 | Loan from Bank Rs. 16,000 | Furniture Rs. 10,000.
Trial Balance of Bhaktapur Traders
As on the last day of Chaitra 2082
| S.N. | Particulars (Account Heads) | L.F. | Debit Balance (Rs.) | Credit Balance (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Opening Stock A/c | 25,000 | — | |
| 2. | Purchases A/c | 1,10,000 | — | |
| 3. | Sales A/c | — | 1,95,000 | |
| 4. | Capital A/c | — | 1,40,000 | |
| 5. | Building A/c | 1,20,000 | — | |
| 6. | Debtors A/c | 35,000 | — | |
| 7. | Creditors A/c | — | 28,000 | |
| 8. | Purchase Return (Return Outward) A/c | — | 5,000 | |
| 9. | Sales Return (Return Inward) A/c | 7,000 | — | |
| 10. | Wages A/c | 18,000 | — | |
| 11. | Salaries A/c | 24,000 | — | |
| 12. | Rent Paid A/c | 12,000 | — | |
| 13. | Commission Received A/c | — | 6,000 | |
| 14. | Cash at Bank A/c | 19,000 | — | |
| 15. | Drawings A/c | 8,000 | — | |
| 16. | Bad Debts A/c | 2,000 | — | |
| 17. | Loan from Bank A/c | — | 16,000 | |
| 18. | Furniture A/c | 10,000 | — | |
| Grand Total | 3,90,000 | 3,90,000 |
Answer: The Trial Balance agrees, with a Grand Total of Rs. 3,90,000 on both the Debit and Credit sides.
Working notes:
- Debit side: Assets (Building, Debtors, Cash at Bank, Furniture), expenses and losses (Wages, Salaries, Rent Paid, Bad Debts), Opening Stock, Purchases, Sales Return and Drawings:
25,000 + 1,10,000 + 1,20,000 + 35,000 + 7,000 + 18,000 + 24,000 + 12,000 + 19,000 + 8,000 + 2,000 + 10,000 = 3,90,000. - Credit side: Capital, liabilities (Creditors, Loan from Bank), incomes (Sales, Commission Received) and Purchase Return:
1,95,000 + 1,40,000 + 28,000 + 5,000 + 6,000 + 16,000 = 3,90,000. - Watch out: Cash at Bank is an asset (Debit), but Loan from Bank is a liability (Credit). Sales Return is a Debit and Purchase Return is a Credit, the opposite of Sales and Purchases.
Unit 16 Solutions: Government Accounting in Nepal
Answers to the Unit 16 exercises. Each answer is as long as its marks call for: a sentence or two for 1 mark, four explained points for 4 marks, and an introduction, explained points and a conclusion for 8 marks.
A. Very Short Answer Questions (1 Mark Each)
1. Define Government Accounting.
Government Accounting is the process of recording, classifying, summarizing, reporting and auditing all financial transactions relating to the receipt, transfer and expenditure of public funds and government property, in accordance with parliamentary budget appropriations and financial rules.
2. When was the State Audit Office and the Civil Personnel Record Office established in Nepal?
The State Audit Office was established by King Prithvi Narayan Shah in 1769 A.D., soon after the unification of Nepal, and the Civil Personnel Record Office was established in 1925 B.S. (1868 A.D.).
3. Who propounded the Traditional Bookkeeping System, and in which year?
Chief Clerk Gunwant propounded the Traditional Bookkeeping System in 1936 B.S. (1879 A.D.).
4. Define Daily Sub-Total, Cumulative Grand Total, Classified Ledger, and Final Summary Statement.
- Daily Sub-Total: The total of one day’s entries in the Primary Daily Record, closed with a single line.
- Cumulative Grand Total: The accumulated total of all entries up to that day, closed with double lines.
- Classified Ledger: The book, similar to a modern ledger, in which receipts (Revenue Ledger) and expenditures (Expenditure Ledger) were classified head by head.
- Final Summary Statement: The summary statement, similar to a Balance Sheet, prepared at the end of a job, a month or a year.
5. When was the Accounts Committee formed to draft the New Accounting System, and on what date was the New Accounting System approved?
The Accounts Committee was formed on 2nd February 1961 A.D. The New Accounting System was approved by the Auditor General on 2nd February 1962 A.D. and received royal assent from King Mahendra on 15th March 1962 A.D.
6. Which Part of the Constitution of Nepal (2072 B.S.) provides for the Auditor General?
Part 22 (Articles 240–241) of the Constitution of Nepal, 2072 B.S.
B. Short Answer Questions (4 Marks Each)
1. Differentiate between Government Accounting and Commercial Accounting on any five bases.
| Basis | Government Accounting | Commercial (Business) Accounting |
|---|---|---|
| Users and organization | Kept by federal, provincial and local government ministries, departments and offices | Kept by private and public commercial business enterprises |
| Main objective | To keep public expenditure within the limits approved by Parliament and to render public service | To find the net profit or loss and show the true financial position (Balance Sheet) of the business |
| Basis of accounting | Mainly the cash basis (and the budgetary commitment basis) | The accrual (mercantile) basis, recording both cash and credit transactions |
| Level classification | Divided into two levels: Central Level Accounting and Operating Level Accounting | No division into central and operating levels |
| Rules and forms | Governed by the Financial Procedure and Fiscal Accountability Act and uses standardized Auditor General Forms (AGF) | Governed by GAAP / Nepal Financial Reporting Standards (NFRS) and the organization’s own policies |
| Audit | Internal audit by the DTCO and final statutory audit by the Office of the Auditor General | Audit by independent registered or Chartered Accountants (ICAN members) |
| Statements prepared | Statements of revenue and expenditure against budget heads, such as the Monthly Statement of Expenditure and the Central Consolidated Financial Statements | Trading Account, Profit & Loss Account and Balance Sheet |
2. Explain the three books used under the Traditional Bookkeeping System (Primary Daily Record, Classified Ledger, and Final Summary Statement).
The Traditional Bookkeeping System, introduced by Chief Clerk Gunwant in 1936 B.S. (1879 A.D.), used three books:
- Primary Daily Record: This was the book of first entry. It was kept on handmade paper folded into 16, 24 or 36 creases, with receipts written on the left side and payments on the right side. Each day’s entries were totalled and closed with a single line (the Daily Sub-Total), and the running total to date was closed with double lines (the Cumulative Grand Total). The record was divided into three parts: the Cash Record, the Store/Property Record and the Security Deposit Record.
- Classified Ledger: This book was similar to a modern Ledger. The receipts and expenditures were classified by head, with receipts grouped in the Revenue Ledger and expenditures in the Expenditure Ledger, so that the total under each head could be known.
- Final Summary Statement: This statement summarized the accounts and was similar to a modern Balance Sheet. It was prepared as a Job-ending, Month-ending or Year-ending Summary Statement, depending on whether a job, a month or the year had been completed.
This system remained in practice up to F.Y. 2022/23 B.S.
3. Write short notes on: (a) Office of the Auditor General (OAG), (b) Financial Comptroller General Office (FCGO), and (c) District Treasury Comptroller Office (DTCO).
(a) Office of the Auditor General (OAG): The OAG was established on 29 June 1959 A.D., succeeding the State Audit Office of 1769 A.D. It is a constitutional body under Part 22 (Articles 240–241) of the Constitution of Nepal, 2072 B.S. The Auditor General is appointed by the President on the recommendation of the Constitutional Council for a six-year term. The OAG:
- conducts the final statutory audit of all federal, provincial and local government offices, courts, parliament, army, police and wholly-owned corporate bodies, with due regard to regularity, economy, efficiency, effectiveness and propriety;
- prescribes and approves all government accounting forms (AGF forms); and
- submits its Annual Audit Report to the President for tabling before the Federal Parliament.
(b) Financial Comptroller General Office (FCGO): The FCGO was first set up as the Accountant General Office in 2008 B.S. and was reorganized as the FCGO in 2032 B.S. under the Ministry of Finance. It:
- oversees the Consolidated Fund and national treasury operations through the Treasury Single Account (TSA);
- supervises all 77 District Treasury Comptroller Offices and directs internal auditing; and
- prepares the Central Consolidated Financial Statements of the Government of Nepal and submits them to the OAG for final audit.
(c) District Treasury Comptroller Office (DTCO): DTCOs were established in all districts starting from F.Y. 2038/39 B.S. as the district-level operating wing of the FCGO under the Ministry of Finance. A DTCO:
- releases approved budget funds and authorizes payments through the TSA for all government offices in the district;
- conducts the mandatory internal audit of all operating-level government offices in the district; and
- compiles district-wide monthly and annual revenue and expenditure statements for the FCGO.
C. Long Analytical Questions (8 Marks Each)
1. Trace the historical evolution of Government Accounting in Nepal and explain the four accounting systems practiced in Nepal prior to the introduction of the New Accounting System.
Government accounting in Nepal has a history of more than 1,500 years. It grew from simple records of royal revenue on palm leaves into a uniform double-entry system for every government office. Its evolution can be traced as follows:
Historical evolution:
- Lichchhavi period: State revenue came from land and agricultural tax, animal husbandry tax, commercial tax, charitable trusts and voluntary community labour. It was spent on royal administration, war and temples.
- Malla period: Growing trade between India and Tibet made customs duties and the minting of coins major sources of state revenue. Accounts were kept on palm leaves and scrolls of traditional handmade paper.
- Shah unification (1825 B.S. onwards): After the unification of Nepal in 1825 B.S. (1768 A.D.), King Prithvi Narayan Shah established the State Audit Office in 1769 A.D. to inspect and audit state accounts. In 1871 B.S. (1814 A.D.), a Red Seal Revenue Register was introduced to record state revenue and administrative expenditure, followed by a Master Land Assessment Register for land holdings and land revenue. In 1925 B.S. (1868 A.D.), the Civil Personnel Record Office was set up to keep the records and salary rolls of civil servants and army personnel; it still works today as the National Personnel Record Department.
- Rana period to modern times: Four accounting systems were used one after another (explained below), until the New Accounting System was implemented from F.Y. 2019/20 B.S.
The four accounting systems before the New Accounting System:
- Statement of Remainder System (early Rana period, before 1936 B.S.): This system was based on the single entry system and was used for small, short-term projects. Revenue collected was written on one side and expenditure on the other, and the account was closed only at the end of the year or when the project was completed. It was replaced because it was unscientific and incomplete, and it could not classify revenue and expenditure under separate budget heads as state activities grew.
- Traditional Bookkeeping System (1936 B.S. / 1879 A.D.): Propounded by Chief Clerk Gunwant, it used three books. The Primary Daily Record recorded receipts on the left and payments on the right of folded handmade paper, with the Daily Sub-Total closed by a single line and the Cumulative Grand Total by double lines; it was divided into Cash, Store/Property and Security Deposit Records. The Classified Ledger grouped receipts (Revenue Ledger) and expenditures (Expenditure Ledger) by head, and the Final Summary Statement, like a Balance Sheet, was prepared at the end of a job, month or year. It remained in practice up to F.Y. 2022/23 B.S., but it could not cope with the development budgets and double-entry banking controls needed after 2007 B.S.
- Form-Based Accounting System (1968 B.S. / 1911 A.D.): This system was introduced to record land revenue in the Terai and urban districts, using 51 standardized forms such as the Cashier’s Day Book, 10-Days Report, 15-Days Report and Monthly Pay Sheet. It was confined mainly to land revenue offices and did not give the country a unified double-entry framework.
- Payment-Based Accounting System (2017 B.S. / 1960 A.D.): This system followed the start of the Budget System (2008 B.S.), the First Five-Year Plan (2013 B.S.) and the Government Fund Expenditure Act 2016 B.S. It was the first system based on the double entry principle. It divided government offices into Central Level Offices (ministries and departments) and Operating Level Offices (district and project offices), and introduced the freezing of unspent budget into the Consolidated Fund at year-end. Within two years, it was replaced by the more complete and standardized New Accounting System (2018/2019 B.S.).
Conclusion: Government accounting in Nepal moved step by step from simple revenue registers and a single-entry statement to the double-entry Payment-Based System. Each system was replaced when it could no longer meet the needs of a growing state. These experiences prepared the ground for the uniform, scientific New Accounting System that every government office uses today.
2. What is the New Accounting System of the Government of Nepal? Explain its major features and importance.
Meaning: The New Accounting System is the uniform, scientific, double-entry and bank-based accounting system used by all government offices of Nepal. To design it, the Government of Nepal formed a four-member Accounts Committee on 2nd February 1961 A.D., with the Accountant General of Nepal as coordinator and, as members, the Under Secretary of the Foreign Aid Division, Ministry of Finance, the Public Administration Advisor of USAID and an Accounting Specialist of the United Nations. After 288 days of study, the Committee submitted its draft report. The system was approved by the Auditor General on 2nd February 1962 A.D., received royal assent from King Mahendra on 15th March 1962 A.D., and was implemented from F.Y. 2019/20 B.S., first in Kathmandu Valley, then in the Bagmati and Narayani Zones in 2020/21 B.S., and in all districts of Nepal by July 1968 A.D.
Major features:
- Based on the double entry system: Every transaction is recorded in both its debit and credit aspects, using Journal Vouchers (AGF No. 10, now AGF 203).
- Based on cash and banking transactions: All revenue and budget releases go through bank accounts (Nepal Rastra Bank or commercial banks), and all payments except petty cash are made by cheque or electronic fund transfer (EFT / TSA).
- Budgetary control through budget heads: Expenditure is tracked against the approved budget heads in the Budget Sheet (AGF No. 8, now AGF 208), so no office can spend beyond its approved budget.
- Two-level classification: Central Level Accounting is kept by constitutional bodies, ministries and central departments, and Operating Level Accounting by regional, district and project offices that receive budget releases and spend on the ground.
- Uniformity and simplicity through AGF forms: Every government office uses the same numbered Auditor General Forms. In 2076 B.S., these were updated into the 200-series forms, such as the Journal Voucher (AGF 203), Budget Sheet (AGF 208), Bank Cash Book (AGF 209) and Monthly Statement of Expenditure (AGF 210).
- Use of brackets ( ): Brackets are used in the Budget Sheet and Bank Cash Book to show negative figures, credit balances or deductions, such as the clearance of an advance.
- Compulsory internal and final audit: Internal audit is carried out by the DTCO, and the final statutory audit by the Office of the Auditor General.
Importance:
- Uniform accounts across the country: Because every office uses the same forms and procedures, accounts are easy to compare and to combine into national figures, and staff transferred from one office to another can work without retraining.
- Control over public spending: Budget heads and the Budget Sheet keep each office’s spending within the amounts approved by Parliament.
- Accuracy of records: The double entry system makes errors easier to detect and gives a complete record of every receipt and payment.
- Safety of public money: Routing receipts and payments through banks reduces the handling of cash and the risk of theft, loss and misuse.
- Easier audit and accountability: Vouchers and AGF forms give a clear trail for the DTCO’s internal audit and the OAG’s final audit, which helps curb corruption and irregularities.
- Information for planning and budgeting: Monthly and annual statements give the Ministry of Finance and the National Planning Commission the revenue and expenditure figures they need to prepare the next year’s budget.
Conclusion: The New Accounting System replaced the earlier scattered systems with one scientific, double-entry and bank-based system for the whole country. By keeping spending within the budget and making every rupee of public money traceable and auditable, it has become the foundation of transparent and accountable government accounting in Nepal.
Model Question Paper Solutions
Answers to the full-length model question paper in the appendix. Each answer is written to the marks shown against its question: one sentence for each 1-mark question in Group A, five marks’ worth of points, tables or working in Group B (split as the paper shows, such as 1 + 4), and a complete draft or full working for each 8-mark question in Group C.
Group ‘A’ — Very Short Answer Questions (11 × 1 = 11 Marks)
1. Define an office according to the modern functional view.
According to the modern functional view, an office is not merely a room or building but the set of functions of collecting, recording, processing, storing and communicating information, wherever they are performed; as Edward Roche put it, “An office exists anywhere, where certain kinds of work are performed.”
2. Who is a Receptionist?
A Receptionist (Front Desk Officer) is an office assistant stationed at the main entrance or inquiry desk who welcomes visitors, answers incoming telephone calls, keeps the visitor logbook and directs guests to the concerned section.
3. Under which regulation are dead records disposed of in government offices of Nepal?
Dead (expired or useless) records in government offices of Nepal are disposed of under the Record Disposal Regulation, 2027 B.S., by shredding or burning them under the supervision of an official committee.
4. When did Nepal become a member of the Universal Postal Union (UPU)?
Nepal became a full member of the Universal Postal Union (UPU) on 11 October 1956 A.D.
5. What is meant by Entrepôt Trade?
Entrepôt (re-export) trade is the import of goods from one country, not for home consumption, but for processing or re-packing and exporting them to a third country, as trading hubs such as Singapore and Dubai do.
6. State the minimum and maximum number of shareholders in a Private Limited Company in Nepal.
Under the Companies Act, 2063 B.S., a Private Limited Company in Nepal must have a minimum of 1 and a maximum of 101 shareholders.
7. What is meant by Quorum of a meeting?
Quorum is the minimum number or percentage of eligible members (usually more than half, such as 51% or two-thirds) who must be present before a meeting can legally begin and pass valid resolutions.
8. Who propounded the Double Entry System of bookkeeping, and in which year?
The Double Entry System was propounded by the Italian mathematician Fra Luca Pacioli in 1494 A.D., in his book Summa de Arithmetica, Geometria, Proportioni et Proportionalita, published in Venice.
9. State the Fundamental Accounting Equation.
The Fundamental Accounting Equation is Assets = Capital + Liabilities.
10. In which two situations does a Contra Entry (‘C’) occur in a Cash Book?
A contra entry occurs when (1) cash is deposited into the bank and (2) cash is withdrawn from the bank for office use; cash withdrawn for personal use is Drawings, not a contra entry.
11. Define Daily Sub-Total and Cumulative Grand Total under the Traditional Bookkeeping System.
Under Chief Clerk Gunwant’s Traditional Bookkeeping System (1936 B.S.), the Daily Sub-Total was the total of each day’s receipts or payments in the Primary Daily Record, closed with a single line. The Cumulative Grand Total was the running total of all the days so far, closed with double lines.
Group ‘B’ — Short Answer and Practical Questions (8 × 5 = 40 Marks)
12. What is an office? Explain any four basic functions of an office. (1 + 4 = 5)
Meaning (1 mark): An office is the administrative centre of an organization where information is collected, recorded, processed, stored and communicated so that management can plan and control its activities. In the modern view, the word refers to these functions rather than to the four walls of a room; as Mills and Standingford say, “The office is the administrative center of a business.”
Four basic functions (4 marks):
- Collecting and receiving information: The office gathers internal information (departmental reports, staff attendance, stock levels, cash balances) and external information (letters, invoices, circulars, emails, government directives and customer inquiries).
- Recording information: The information collected is written down systematically in entry books, journals, ledgers, minutes and personnel registers, so that it can be checked later and produced as legal evidence.
- Processing and arranging information: Raw data is sorted, classified, calculated and summarized into a useful form; for example, hundreds of daily sales bills are turned into a monthly sales summary, a Trial Balance or an Income Statement.
- Communicating information: The office supplies processed reports upward to top management for decisions, and passes orders, budgets and guidelines downward to departments and outward to customers, creditors and regulators.
The fifth basic function is storing and preserving information through scientific filing and indexing, so that records can be found again when needed.
13. Define Office Resources and explain any four types of office resources used in a modern organization. (1 + 4 = 5)
Meaning (1 mark): Office resources are all the productive inputs an office uses to carry out its administrative and operational work, commonly summed up as the 5 Ms (Men/Manpower, Money, Materials, Machines and Methods/Information) plus transport and communication facilities.
Four types of office resources (4 marks):
- Human resources (manpower): These are the administrative staff (chiefs, managers, officers and clerks) and technical staff (engineers, IT specialists and chartered accountants). Manpower is the only active, living resource: it thinks, plans and decides, and it puts every other resource to use. It needs scientific recruitment, training, fair pay and motivation.
- Financial resources: Money is the lifeblood of an office, used to pay salaries, rent and utilities and to buy assets. A government office gets it from taxes, customs, royalties and grants; a business from capital, sales revenue and bank loans; a service-motive office from donations and subscriptions. It is controlled through budgeting, double-entry accounting and audit.
- Physical and material resources: These include durable items used for more than a year (land, building, furniture, computers, vehicles) and consumable stationery used up in daily work (paper, pens, files, ink, stamps). They are bought through proper procurement, recorded in the store ledger (Inventory Register), maintained and insured.
- Communication resources: Telephone, mobile, email, internet, website, fax, postal service and notice boards allow quick internal and external exchange of messages, orders, reports and invoices. The choice of medium depends on urgency, cost, confidentiality and the need for written proof.
The other types are transportation resources (land, air and water transport for staff, mail and supplies) and intellectual and informational resources (software, databases, patents and operating manuals).
14. Differentiate between an Ordinary Letter and a Registered Letter, and draw a neat specimen of an Entry Book (Incoming Mail Register). (3 + 2 = 5)
(a) Ordinary Letter and Registered Letter (3 marks):
| Basis of Difference | Ordinary Letter | Registered Letter |
|---|---|---|
| Nature of message | Simple, routine and non-urgent messages | Important, urgent, legal and confidential documents such as cheques, legal notices and appointment letters |
| Recording at the post office | Not recorded individually; dropped straight into the letterbox | Handed over at the postal counter and recorded in the post office register |
| Postage cost | Cheap; needs only the minimum basic postage stamp | Costlier; an extra registration fee is paid on top of normal postage |
| Proof of posting | The post office issues no receipt | The post office issues an official receipt as legal proof of posting |
| Responsibility for delivery | The post office bears no liability if the letter is lost or damaged | The post office tracks it, takes the receiver’s signature on delivery and is responsible for safe delivery |
(b) Specimen of an Entry Book (2 marks):
Entry Book (Incoming Mail Register) of Shree Janajyoti Secondary School, Itahari, Sunsari
| Entry No. | Date of Entry | Received Letter’s Ref. No. | Received Letter’s Date | Name of Sending Office/Person | Subject | Section / Officer Forwarded To | Signature & Date | Remarks |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 215 | 2082-04-10 | 082/83-31 | 2082-04-08 | Education Section, Itahari Sub-Metropolitan City | Teachers’ training schedule | Administration Section | Signed (04/10) | Urgent |
| 216 | 2082-04-11 | 082/83-77 | 2082-04-09 | Nepal Telecom, Biratnagar | Internet bill for Asar | Accounts Section | Signed (04/11) | Bill enclosed |
| 217 | 2082-04-11 | — | 2082-04-10 | Mrs. Sita Rai (guardian) | Leave application for a Grade 9 student | Exam & Admin Section | Signed (04/11) | — |
15. Define a Partnership Firm and differentiate between a Private Limited Company and a Public Limited Company on any four bases. (1 + 4 = 5)
Partnership Firm (1 mark): A Partnership Firm is an association of two or more persons who pool their capital, labour and skill under a written agreement called the Partnership Deed to carry on a lawful business and share its profits and losses in an agreed ratio; in Nepal it is governed by the Partnership Act, 2020 B.S.
Private Limited Company and Public Limited Company (4 marks):
| Basis of Comparison | Private Limited Company (Pvt. Ltd.) | Public Limited Company (Ltd.) |
|---|---|---|
| Number of shareholders | Minimum 1 and maximum 101 | Minimum 7, with no upper limit |
| Invitation to the public | Prohibited from issuing a prospectus to invite the public to buy its shares or debentures | Can issue a prospectus (IPO/FPO) inviting the public to subscribe to its shares and debentures |
| Transfer of shares | Restricted by its Articles of Association | Freely transferable and traded on the Nepal Stock Exchange (NEPSE) |
| Minimum paid-up capital | No high statutory minimum; fixed by the promoters in the Memorandum | At least Rs. 1,00,00,000 under the Companies Act (higher for banks and insurers) |
| Name suffix | Must end its name with “Private Limited (Pvt. Ltd.)” | Must end its name with “Limited (Ltd.)” |
| Examples | Dabur Nepal Pvt. Ltd., Surya Nepal Pvt. Ltd. | Nabil Bank Ltd., Unilever Nepal Ltd. |
16. Differentiate between Bookkeeping and Accounting, and explain the Business Entity Concept and Money Measurement Concept. (3 + 2 = 5)
(a) Bookkeeping and Accounting (3 marks): Bookkeeping is the foundation on which accounting is built, which is why it is said that “Accounting begins where bookkeeping ends.”
| Basis of Comparison | Bookkeeping | Accounting |
|---|---|---|
| Scope and stage | Primary stage and narrower in scope: recording (Journal, subsidiary books) and classifying (Ledger) transactions | Secondary stage and wider in scope: includes bookkeeping and goes on to summarizing, analyzing, interpreting and communicating the results |
| Objective | To keep systematic, date-wise and permanent records of day-to-day transactions | To find the net profit or loss and the financial position, and report them to decision-makers |
| Nature of work | Routine, clerical and repetitive | Analytical, executive and interpretive |
| Person responsible | Junior clerk or bookkeeper with basic knowledge of debit and credit | Senior accountant or chartered accountant with knowledge of accounting standards, tax laws and financial analysis |
| Financial statements | Trading Account, Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet are not prepared | Preparing and interpreting the final accounts is its main output |
(b) Accounting concepts (2 marks):
- Business Entity Concept: The business is treated as a unit separate and distinct from its owner. So when the proprietor invests Rs. 5,00,000, the business records it as Capital owed to the owner, and when the owner takes Rs. 10,000 for domestic expenses, it is recorded as Drawings, not as a business expense.
- Money Measurement Concept: Only those transactions and events that can be expressed in money (Nepalese Rupees) are recorded in the books. Events that cannot be measured in money, such as a quarrel between two managers or the high skill of a worker, are not recorded, however important they may be.
17. From the following transactions of Bagmati Garment House, Kathmandu, prepare a Purchase Book. (5)
- Shrawan 3: Purchased from Hetauda Textile Mills (Invoice No. 45): 40 shirts @ Rs. 800 each and 30 trousers @ Rs. 1,200 each, less 10% trade discount.
- Shrawan 10: Purchased from Biratnagar Cotton Suppliers (Invoice No. 78): 25 jackets @ Rs. 2,000 each and 20 sweaters @ Rs. 1,000 each.
- Shrawan 18: Purchased a sewing machine and office table for office use from Patan Furniture on credit for Rs. 25,000.
- Shrawan 25: Purchased 15 T-shirts @ Rs. 500 each for cash from New Road Store.
Purchase Book of Bagmati Garment House, Kathmandu
| Date | Particulars | Invoice No. | L.F. | Details (Rs.) | Total Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-04-03 | Hetauda Textile Mills 40 Shirts @ Rs. 800 each 30 Trousers @ Rs. 1,200 each Sub-total Less: 10% Trade Discount | 45 | 32,000 36,000 68,000 (6,800) | 61,200 | |
| 2082-04-10 | Biratnagar Cotton Suppliers 25 Jackets @ Rs. 2,000 each 20 Sweaters @ Rs. 1,000 each | 78 | 50,000 20,000 | 70,000 | |
| 2082-04-31 | Total — Purchase A/c (Dr.) | 1,31,200 |
Answer: Total of the Purchase Book (Purchase A/c Dr.) = Rs. 1,31,200.
Notes on Excluded Transactions:
- Shrawan 18: The sewing machine and office table from Patan Furniture (Rs. 25,000) are excluded because they are fixed assets bought for office use, not goods for resale (a credit purchase of an asset goes to the Journal Proper).
- Shrawan 25: The 15 T-shirts from New Road Store (
15 × 500 = 7,500) are excluded because it is a cash purchase (recorded in the Cash Book).
Working notes:
- Year: the paper gives no year, so 2082 is used.
- Credit purchases: The Shrawan 3 and Shrawan 10 purchases name the supplier and do not say “for cash”, so they are credit purchases and belong in the Purchase Book.
- Trade discount:
10% of 68,000 = 6,800is deducted on the face of the invoice, so only the net amount of Rs. 61,200 is carried to the Total column.
18. Prepare a Trial Balance of Pokhara Traders as on the last day of Ashadh 2082 from the following ledger balances. (5)
- Capital: Rs. 2,00,000 | Opening Stock: Rs. 30,000 | Purchases: Rs. 1,40,000 | Sales: Rs. 2,50,000 | Debtors: Rs. 50,000 | Creditors: Rs. 35,000 | Machinery: Rs. 1,50,000 | Cash at Bank: Rs. 40,000 | Bank Overdraft: Rs. 20,000 | Salaries: Rs. 45,000 | Rent Paid: Rs. 25,000 | Purchase Return: Rs. 6,000 | Sales Return: Rs. 8,000 | Drawings: Rs. 15,000 | Discount Allowed: Rs. 5,000 | Commission Received: Rs. 7,000 | Bad Debts: Rs. 10,000.
Trial Balance of Pokhara Traders
As on the last day of Ashadh 2082
| S.N. | Particulars (Account Heads) | L.F. | Debit Balance (Rs.) | Credit Balance (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Capital A/c | — | 2,00,000 | |
| 2. | Opening Stock A/c | 30,000 | — | |
| 3. | Purchases A/c | 1,40,000 | — | |
| 4. | Sales A/c | — | 2,50,000 | |
| 5. | Debtors A/c | 50,000 | — | |
| 6. | Creditors A/c | — | 35,000 | |
| 7. | Machinery A/c | 1,50,000 | — | |
| 8. | Cash at Bank A/c | 40,000 | — | |
| 9. | Bank Overdraft A/c | — | 20,000 | |
| 10. | Salaries A/c | 45,000 | — | |
| 11. | Rent Paid A/c | 25,000 | — | |
| 12. | Purchase Return (Return Outward) A/c | — | 6,000 | |
| 13. | Sales Return (Return Inward) A/c | 8,000 | — | |
| 14. | Drawings A/c | 15,000 | — | |
| 15. | Discount Allowed A/c | 5,000 | — | |
| 16. | Commission Received A/c | — | 7,000 | |
| 17. | Bad Debts A/c | 10,000 | — | |
| Grand Total | 5,18,000 | 5,18,000 |
Answer: The Trial Balance agrees at Rs. 5,18,000 on both the Debit and Credit sides.
Working notes:
- Bank balances: Cash at Bank (Rs. 40,000) is an asset and goes on the Debit side; Bank Overdraft (Rs. 20,000) is money owed to a bank, a liability, so it goes on the Credit side. Both are given, so both are shown (the firm can hold a current account in one bank and an overdraft in another).
- Returns: Purchase Return reduces purchases and is a Credit item; Sales Return reduces sales and is a Debit item.
- Losses and incomes: Discount Allowed and Bad Debts are losses (Debit); Commission Received is an income (Credit). Drawings reduce capital and go on the Debit side.
19. Differentiate between Government Accounting and Commercial Accounting on any five bases. (5)
| Basis of Comparison | Government Accounting | Commercial (Business) Accounting |
|---|---|---|
| Users and organization | Federal, provincial and local government ministries, departments and offices | Private and public commercial business enterprises |
| Primary objective | To keep public expenditure within the budget limits approved by Parliament and to render public service | To find the net profit or loss and show the true financial position (Balance Sheet) of the business |
| Basis of accounting | Mainly the cash basis (and budgetary commitment basis) | The accrual (mercantile) basis, recording both cash and credit transactions |
| Level classification | Divided into Central Level Accounting and Operating Level Accounting | No division into central and operating levels |
| Rules and forms | Governed by the Financial Procedure and Fiscal Accountability Act and uses standard Auditor General Forms (AGF) | Governed by GAAP / Nepal Financial Reporting Standards (NFRS) and the organization’s own policies |
| Auditing authority | Internal audit by the DTCO and final audit by the Office of the Auditor General | Audited by independent registered or chartered accountants (ICAN members) |
Group ‘C’ — Long Analytical and Numerical Questions (3 × 8 = 24 Marks)
20. Draft an imaginary Order Letter from Koshi Educational Suppliers, Biratnagar to CDC Textbook Distributors, Bhaktapur ordering textbooks for Grade 9, OR draft a complete Minute of a Meeting of your School Management Committee regarding the establishment of a Science and Accounting Library. (8)
In the examination you answer only one option; both are drafted here.
Option 1: Order Letter
KOSHI EDUCATIONAL SUPPLIERS
Main Road, Biratnagar, Morang, Nepal
Phone: 021-52XXXXRef. No.: 082/83-17
Date: 2082-01-08The Sales Manager,
CDC Textbook Distributors,
Sanothimi, Bhaktapur.Subject: Order for Grade 9 Textbooks
Dear Sir,
We thank you for your quotation letter Ref. No. CTD/082/29 dated 2082-01-02 and the price list of Grade 9 textbooks for the academic session 2082. We accept your terms of a 20% trade discount on the printed price and free delivery up to our godown at Main Road, Biratnagar. Please supply the following textbooks at the earliest:
S.N. Title of the Book Grade Edition Quantity (Copies) Unit Price (Rs.) Amount (Rs.) 1. Compulsory English Grade 9 2082 Edition 300 180 54,000 2. Compulsory Nepali Grade 9 2082 Edition 300 160 48,000 3. Compulsory Mathematics Grade 9 2082 Edition 300 220 66,000 4. Science and Technology Grade 9 2082 Edition 300 250 75,000 5. Social Studies Grade 9 2082 Edition 300 200 60,000 6. Office Operations and Accounting Grade 9 2082 Edition 150 190 28,500 Total at printed price 1,650 3,31,500 Less: 20% Trade Discount (66,300) Net Amount 2,65,200 We have enclosed an A/C Payee Cheque No. 0087415 drawn on Rastriya Banijya Bank Ltd., Biratnagar Branch, for Rs. 1,00,000 (Rupees One Lakh only) as an advance payment. The balance of Rs. 1,65,200 will be paid within 30 days of receiving the consignment and tax invoice. As schools in our area are about to open for the new session, please dispatch the books by 2082-01-20, packed title-wise in waterproof bundles. Any damaged or misprinted copies will be returned to you for replacement.
Yours faithfully,
(Signed)
Rajendra Prasad Koirala
Proprietor
Encl.: Rastriya Banijya Bank Ltd. Cheque No. 0087415 for Rs. 1,00,000.
C.C.: Accounts Section
Option 2: Minute of a Meeting
MINUTE OF THE MEETING OF THE SCHOOL MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE
Today, on 2082 Baisakh 21, Sunday, at 11:00 A.M., a meeting of the School Management Committee of Shree Janajyoti Secondary School, Itahari-5, Sunsari was held in the Principal’s Office under the chairpersonship of SMC Chairperson Mr. Dil Bahadur Limbu.
1. Attendance:
S.N. Name of the Member Designation Signature 1. Mr. Dil Bahadur Limbu Chairperson D.B. Limbu 2. Mrs. Laxmi Devi Chaudhary Ward Representative Member L.D. Chaudhary 3. Mr. Ram Kumar Mandal Guardians’ Representative R.K. Mandal 4. Mrs. Sarita Karki Guardians’ Representative S. Karki 5. Mr. Gopal Prasad Bhattarai Local Educationist Member G.P. Bhattarai 6. Ms. Anita Shrestha Teachers’ Representative A. Shrestha 7. Mr. Keshav Raj Dahal Principal & Member-Secretary K.R. Dahal Invitees: Mr. Suresh Yadav (Science Teacher) and Mrs. Bimala Thapa (Accountancy Teacher).
2. Agendas for Discussion:
- Agenda No. 1: Regarding the establishment of a Science and Accounting Library.
- Agenda No. 2: Regarding the budget and sources of funds for the library.
- Agenda No. 3: Regarding the management and operation of the library.
- Agenda No. 4: Miscellaneous.
3. Decisions / Resolutions Passed:
- Decision No. 1: After detailed discussion of the Principal’s proposal on Agenda No. 1, it was unanimously decided to establish a Science and Accounting Library in Room No. 12 of the new building from the academic session 2082 B.S., stocked with reference books, practical manuals, journals and specimen account books for Grades 9 to 12, along with two computers for e-library use.
- Decision No. 2: Regarding Agenda No. 2, it was decided to approve a budget of Rs. 4,50,000 (Rs. 2,50,000 for books and journals, Rs. 1,20,000 for racks, tables and chairs, and Rs. 80,000 for two computers). Rs. 2,50,000 will be met from the school development fund, and a request for Rs. 2,00,000 will be sent to Itahari Sub-Metropolitan City and local donors. Books, furniture and computers will be bought by inviting sealed quotations as per the prevailing financial rules.
- Decision No. 3: Regarding Agenda No. 3, it was decided to form a five-member Library Management Sub-committee coordinated by Mr. Gopal Prasad Bhattarai, with Ms. Anita Shrestha, Mr. Suresh Yadav and Mrs. Bimala Thapa as members and Principal Mr. Keshav Raj Dahal as member-secretary. The library will open from 10:00 A.M. to 4:00 P.M. on school days, books will be issued to students for up to seven days, and the Sub-committee will report its progress to the next SMC meeting.
- Decision No. 4: As there were no other matters under Miscellaneous, the Chairperson thanked all members and invitees and declared the meeting adjourned at 1:00 P.M.
Signatures Confirming the Decisions:
(Signed by all 7 attending members, including the Chairperson)
21. Journalize the following transactions in the books of Manakamana Enterprises for Chaitra 2082 and also prepare Cash Account and Ramesh’s Account. (5 + 3 = 8)
- Chaitra 1: Started business with cash Rs. 2,50,000 and furniture Rs. 50,000.
- Chaitra 5: Purchased goods on credit from Ramesh for Rs. 60,000.
- Chaitra 10: Sold goods for cash Rs. 45,000.
- Chaitra 15: Returned defective goods worth Rs. 5,000 to Ramesh.
- Chaitra 20: Paid cash Rs. 53,500 to Ramesh in full settlement of his account.
- Chaitra 25: Withdrew cash Rs. 8,000 by the proprietor for personal use.
- Chaitra 30: Paid staff salary Rs. 20,000 in cash.
(a) Journal Entries (5 marks)
Journal Entries in the Books of Manakamana Enterprises
| Date | Particulars | L.F. | Debit (Rs.) | Credit (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-12-01 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. Furniture A/c …………………………………………… Dr. To Capital A/c (Being business started with cash and furniture) | 2,50,000 50,000 | 3,00,000 | |
| 2082-12-05 | Purchase A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Ramesh’s A/c (Being goods purchased on credit from Ramesh) | 60,000 | 60,000 | |
| 2082-12-10 | Cash A/c ……………………………………………….. Dr. To Sales A/c (Being goods sold for cash) | 45,000 | 45,000 | |
| 2082-12-15 | Ramesh’s A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Purchase Return A/c (Being defective goods returned to Ramesh) | 5,000 | 5,000 | |
| 2082-12-20 | Ramesh’s A/c ……………………………………………. Dr. To Cash A/c To Discount Received A/c (Being cash paid to Ramesh in full settlement of the net balance of Rs. 55,000 [ 60,000 - 5,000] and discount received) | 55,000 | 53,500 1,500 | |
| 2082-12-25 | Drawing A/c …………………………………………….. Dr. To Cash A/c (Being cash withdrawn by the proprietor for personal use) | 8,000 | 8,000 | |
| 2082-12-30 | Salary A/c ……………………………………………… Dr. To Cash A/c (Being staff salary paid in cash) | 20,000 | 20,000 | |
| Grand Total | 4,93,000 | 4,93,000 |
(b) Ledger Accounts (3 marks)
1. Dr. ……………………………………………… Cash Account ……………………………………………… Cr.
| Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-12-01 | To Capital A/c | 2,50,000 | 2082-12-20 | By Ramesh’s A/c | 53,500 | ||
| 2082-12-10 | To Sales A/c | 45,000 | 2082-12-25 | By Drawing A/c | 8,000 | ||
| 2082-12-30 | By Salary A/c | 20,000 | |||||
| 2082-12-30 | By Balance c/d | 2,13,500 | |||||
| Total | 2,95,000 | Total | 2,95,000 | ||||
| 2083-01-01 | To Balance b/d | 2,13,500 |
2. Dr. …………………………………………….. Ramesh’s Account …………………………………………….. Cr.
| Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | J.F. | Amount (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2082-12-15 | To Purchase Return A/c | 5,000 | 2082-12-05 | By Purchase A/c | 60,000 | ||
| 2082-12-20 | To Cash A/c | 53,500 | |||||
| 2082-12-20 | To Discount Received A/c | 1,500 | |||||
| Total | 60,000 | Total | 60,000 |
(Note: Both sides of Ramesh’s Account total Rs. 60,000, so his account is fully settled and closed with no balance.)
Answer: Journal Grand Total = Rs. 4,93,000; closing debit balance of Cash A/c = Rs. 2,13,500; Ramesh’s A/c is closed (Cr. Rs. 60,000 = Dr. Rs. 5,000 + Rs. 53,500 + Rs. 1,500).
Working notes:
- Chaitra 1: Cash and furniture are both brought in by the owner, so one compound entry debits both and credits Capital with Rs. 3,00,000.
- Chaitra 20: After the return, Ramesh is owed
60,000 - 5,000 = 55,000; paying Rs. 53,500 in full settlement gives a discount received of55,000 - 53,500 = 1,500. Only Rs. 53,500 is posted to the Cash Account. - Chaitra 25: Cash taken for personal use is Drawings, not a business expense.
- Cash Account:
2,50,000 + 45,000 - 53,500 - 8,000 - 20,000 = 2,13,500.
22. Prepare a Triple Column Cash Book from the following transactions for the month of Falgun 2082. (8)
- Falgun 1: Cash in hand Rs. 40,000 and Cash at bank Rs. 75,000.
- Falgun 4: Goods purchased for Rs. 25,000; paid Rs. 10,000 in cash and Rs. 15,000 by cheque.
- Falgun 8: Cash deposited into bank Rs. 20,000.
- Falgun 12: Received a cheque of Rs. 28,500 from Sita in full settlement of her account of Rs. 30,000.
- Falgun 17: Paid cash Rs. 19,200 to Gopal in full settlement of his account of Rs. 20,000.
- Falgun 22: Cash withdrawn from bank Rs. 12,000 for office use and Rs. 4,000 for domestic use.
- Falgun 28: Paid rent Rs. 10,000 by cheque and stationery Rs. 2,000 in cash.
Dr. ………………………………… Triple Column Cash Book ………………………………… Cr.
| Date | Particulars | L.F. | Cash (Rs.) | Bank (Rs.) | Disc. Allowed (Rs.) | Date | Particulars | L.F. | Cash (Rs.) | Bank (Rs.) | Disc. Received (Rs.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 082-11-01 | To Balance b/d | 40,000 | 75,000 | — | 082-11-04 | By Purchase A/c | 10,000 | 15,000 | — | ||
| 082-11-08 | To Cash A/c | C | — | 20,000 | — | 082-11-08 | By Bank A/c | C | 20,000 | — | — |
| 082-11-12 | To Sita’s A/c | — | 28,500 | 1,500 | 082-11-17 | By Gopal’s A/c | 19,200 | — | 800 | ||
| 082-11-22 | To Bank A/c | C | 12,000 | — | — | 082-11-22 | By Cash A/c | C | — | 12,000 | — |
| 082-11-22 | By Drawing A/c | — | 4,000 | — | |||||||
| 082-11-28 | By Rent A/c | — | 10,000 | — | |||||||
| 082-11-28 | By Stationery A/c | 2,000 | — | — | |||||||
| 082-11-30 | By Balance c/d | 800 | 82,500 | — | |||||||
| Total | 52,000 | 1,23,500 | 1,500 | Total | 52,000 | 1,23,500 | 800 | ||||
| 082-12-01 | To Balance b/d | 800 | 82,500 |
Answer: Closing Cash Balance = Rs. 800; Closing Bank Balance = Rs. 82,500; Discount Allowed = Rs. 1,500; Discount Received = Rs. 800.
Working notes:
- Contra entries (C): The Falgun 8 deposit (Rs. 20,000) and the Falgun 22 withdrawal for office use (Rs. 12,000) affect both cash and bank, so each is entered on both sides.
- Falgun 4: The purchase of Rs. 25,000 is split: Rs. 10,000 in the Cash column and Rs. 15,000 in the Bank column.
- Falgun 12: The cheque from Sita is treated as deposited the same day, so Rs. 28,500 goes in the Bank column; discount allowed is
30,000 - 28,500 = 1,500. - Falgun 17: Discount received from Gopal is
20,000 - 19,200 = 800. - Falgun 22: The Rs. 4,000 withdrawn for domestic use is Drawings from the Bank column, not a contra entry.
- Balances: Cash
52,000 - 51,200 = 800; Bank1,23,500 - 41,000 = 82,500. The discount columns are only totalled, never balanced.